Agenda packet — San Carlos City Council, November 10, 2025 (part 3 of 10)

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Steel Substrates:

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System, MPI INT 5.1:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive, for metal, MPI #79. 1) Benjamin Moore® Super Spec HP® Alkyd Metal Primer P06 (326 g/L). 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Rust Inhibitive Primer.
3) Sherwin Williams: Pro Industrial Kem Bond HS
b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat.
a. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low Sheen N537. 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Eggshell, 6-9310 Series.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Acrylic Latex Eg-Shel B41W01951 b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Latex Eggshell N538.
2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Satin, 69410.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Acrylic Latex Eg-Shel c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140 X-Green.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 393
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 7
1) Benjamin Moore® Ultra Spec® 500 Interior Semi-Gloss N546. 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Lo Lustre, 6-9610.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semigloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Gloss N546. 2) PPG Paints; Lifemaster Interior 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss, 59211 3) Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss B. Wood Substrates: Wood trim and Architectural woodwork.

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System, MPI INT 6.3A:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. 1) Benjamin Moore® Multi-purpose primer 067
2) PPG Paints; Seal Grip Interior/Exterior Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17- 921XI Series
3) Sherwin Williams PrepRite ProBlock Primer Sealer B51W00620 b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat.
a. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low Sheen N537. 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Eggshell, 6-9310 Series.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Acrylic Latex Eg-Shel B41W01951 b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Latex Eggshell N538.
2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Satin, 69410.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Acrylic Latex Eg-Shel c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore® Ultra Spec® 500 Interior Semi-Gloss N546. 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Lo Lustre, 6-9610.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semigloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Gloss N546. 2) PPG Paints; Lifemaster Interior 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss, 59211 3) Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss C. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates:

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System, MPI INT 9.2B:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. 1) Benjamin Moore Fresh Start High-Hiding All Purpose Primer 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Zero Interior Zero VOC Latex Sealer 6-4900XI 3) Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Zero Interior Latex Primer B28W08150. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low Sheen N537. 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Eggshell, 6-9310 Series.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Acrylic Latex Eg-Shel B41W01951 d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Latex Eggshell N538.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 394
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 8
2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Satin, 69410.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Acrylic Latex Eg-Shel e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore® Ultra Spec® 500 Interior Semi-Gloss N546. 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Lo Lustre, 6-9610.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semigloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Gloss N546. 2) PPG Paints; Lifemaster Interior 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss, 59211 3) Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss

END OF SECTION

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 395
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 1
SECTION 10 1100

VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Visual display board assemblies:
a. Markerboards.

2. Visual display rails.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for visual display surfaces.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.

3. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.

4. Chain-of-Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor.

5. Product Data: Laboratory test reports for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

6. Product Data: For paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

7. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

8. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

9. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show locations of panel joints.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 396
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 2

2. Show locations of special-purpose graphics for visual display surfaces.

3. Include sections of typical trim members.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display unit indicated, for units with factoryapplied color finishes, and as follows:

1. Samples of facings for each visual display panel type, indicating color and texture.

2. Actual factory-finish color samples, applied to substrate.

3. Include accessory Samples to verify color selected.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display surface indicated.

1. Visual Display Surface: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, mounted on substrate indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required.

2. Trim: 6-inch-long sections of each trim profile.

3. Display Rail: 6-inch-long sections.

F. Product Schedule: For visual display surfaces. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics.

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

C. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver factory-built visual display surfaces, including factory-applied trim where indicated, completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site.

B. Store visual display surfaces vertically with packing materials between each unit.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display surfaces until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 397
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 3

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.

2. Warranty Period: Life of the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and unless otherwise noted, provide products by one of the following:

1. Marker Board:
a. Clarus inc Wall to Wall Pure White

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

D. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.

E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Paints and Coatings:

1. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”
F. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 398
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 4
G. Low-emitting requirements – Composite Wood:

1. Composite Wood Evaluation - Composite wood, as defined by the California Air Resources Board, Airborne Toxic Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products Regulation, shall be documented to have low formaldehyde emissions which meet the California Air Resources Board ATCM for formaldehyde requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added formaldehyde resins.

H. Certified Wood: Wood shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004.

I. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.3 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY
A. Visual Display Board Assembly: factory fabricated.

1. Assembly: markerboard.

2. Corners: Square.

3. Width: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Height: As indicated on Drawings.

5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall.

B. Markerboard Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced markerboard panel on core indicated.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

C. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch-thick, extruded aluminum; slim size and standard shape.

1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish.

D. Joints: Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect as indicated on approved Shop Drawings.

E. Combination Assemblies: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed trim between abutting sections of visual display panels.

F. Markertray: Manufacturer's standard; continuous.

1. Solid Type: Extruded aluminum with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed ends.

G. Map Rail: Provide the following accessories:

1. Display Rail: Continuous and integral with map rail; fabricated from cork approximately 1 to 2 inches wide.

2. End Stops: Located at each end of map rail.

3. Poster Clips: Four map hooks with flexible metal clips for every 6 feet of map rail or fraction thereof.

2.4 DISPLAY RAILS
A. Aluminum Display Rail: Continuous and integral with map rail; fabricated from cork approximately 1 to 2 inches wide..

1. Tackable Insert Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 399
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 5

2. End Stops: Located at each end of map rail.

3. Poster Clips: Four map hooks with flexible metal clips for every 6 feet of map rail or fraction thereof.

2.5 MARKERBOARD PANELS
A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboard Panels: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction, consisting of moisture-barrier backing, core material, and porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish. Laminate panels under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard, flexible waterproof adhesive.

1. Face Sheet Thickness: 0.021 inch uncoated base metal thickness.

2. Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch thick, with manufacturer's standard moisture-barrier backing.

3. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant thermoplastic type.

2.6 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two- or three-coat process.

B. Natural Cork Sheet: Seamless, single-layer, compressed fine-grain cork sheet; bulletin board quality; face sanded for natural finish with surface-burning characteristics indicated.

C. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.

D. Fiberboard: ASTM C 208 cellulosic fiber insulating board.

E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.

F. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer.

2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 400
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display surfaces.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards, including dirt, mold, and mildew.

C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display surfaces and wall surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

1. Mounting Height: 36 inches above finished floor to top of chalktray.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FACTORY-FABRICATED VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS AND ASSEMBLIES A. Visual Display Boards: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display boards with fasteners at not more than 16 inches o.c. Secure both top and bottom of boards to walls.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF VISUAL DISPLAY RAILS
A. Display Rails: Install rails in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at height indicated below. Attach to wall surface with fasteners at not more than 16 inches o.c.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning.

END OF SECTION

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 401
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 1
SECTION 10 4413

FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 10 4416 "Fire Extinguishers."

1.3 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to fire-protection cabinets including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Schedules and coordination requirements.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

3. Product Data: Laboratory test reports for interior products indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

4. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 402
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 2
E. Product Schedule: For fire-protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed, semirecessed, or surface mounted. Coordinate final fire-protection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-protection cabinets, accessories, and fire extinguishers from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

D. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

E. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 403
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 3

1. Basis of Design Product – Recessed cabinet: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen’s model #0-2409 or comparable product by one of the following:
a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Potter Roemer LLC.

2. Basis of Design Product – Semi-Recessed and surface mounted cabinet: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen’s model #2409 – Architectural Series or comparable product by one of the following:
a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Cabinet Construction: UL listed with fire resistance rating of hall where it is installed.

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from

0.043-inch-thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.

D. Recessed Cabinet:

1. Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to cabinet.

Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as drywall bead.

E. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.

F. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim.

G. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.

H. Door Material: Steel sheet.

I. Door Style:

1. Recessed Cabinet: Vertical duo panel with frame.

2. Semi-Recessed Cabinet: Solid opaque panel with frame.

3. Surface Mounted Cabinet: Solid opaque panel with frame.

J. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet.

1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet.

K. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard.

2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees.

L. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face.

3. Door Lock: Cylinder lock, keyed alike to other cabinets.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 404
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 4

4. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door.
2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red.
4) Orientation: Vertical.

5. Alarm: Manufacturer's standard alarm that actuates when fire-protection cabinet door is opened and that is powered by batteries.

6. Manufactures projecting wall mounted sign, indicating ‘FIRE EXTINGUISHER”. 1) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 2) Lettering Color: Red.
3) Orientation: Vertical.

M. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. a. Finish: Baked enamel, TGIC polyester powder coat, HAA polyester powder coat, epoxy powder coat, or polyester/epoxy hybrid powder coat, complying with AAMA 2603.
b. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B221 for extruded shapes and aluminum sheet, with strength and durability characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5 for aluminum sheet. a. Finish: Color anodic.
b. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.

3. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304. a. Finish: ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 directional satin finish,.

4. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth.

2. Miter corners and grind smooth.

3. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

4. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.

5. Install door locks at factory.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 405
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 5

2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.

2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.

C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fireprotection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 406
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 6
E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 407
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 4416 - 1
SECTION 10 4416

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.

B. Owner-Furnished Material: Hand-carried fire extinguishers.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 10 4413 "Fire Protection Cabinets."

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fireprotection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 408
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 4416 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. d. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
e. Potter Roemer LLC.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.

4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. c. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
d. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation: Horizontal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 409
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 4416 - 3
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.

END OF SECTION

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 410
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 1
SECTION 12 2413

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories.

2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

4. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

5. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10 inches long.

E. Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 411
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 2

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: 25 Years from Date of Substantial Completion

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 412
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 3
B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 Year from Date of Substantial Completion PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

B. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

C. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

D. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mecho/5 System by Mechoshades Systems Inc or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Manufacturers not listed but who do offer products that comply with the requirements of this Section will be considered as substitute manufacturers, subject to the conditions specified in Division 1 Section Product Substitution Procedures. a. Please note: All window shades procured as part of this project must not contain chemical flame retardants.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.

2.3 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS
A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.

1. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard.
a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.
b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.

2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller shade weight and for lifting heavy roller shades.
a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb (4.5 kg) or for shades as recommended by manufacturer, whichever criterion is more stringent.

B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 413
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 4
shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of inside face of shade.

2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.

3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.

C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.

D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

E. Shadebands:

1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric and Light-blocking fabric.

2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Installation Accessories:

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped.
b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.

2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.

3. Recessed Shade Pocket: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure designed for recessed ceiling installation; with front, top, and back formed as one piece, end plates, and removable bottom closure panel.
a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.
b. Provide pocket with lip at lower edge to support acoustical ceiling panel.

4. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at bottom of site-constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap-in attachment to wall clip without fasteners.
a. Closure-Panel Width: 2 inches.

5. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. a. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 SHADEBAND MATERIALS
A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.

1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.

2. Type: 100% Thermoplastic Olefin (TPO).
a. Basis of Design: EcoVeil Sheer by Mechoshade.
1) 68500 Series (1% Open)
2) Finishes as indicated on drawings.

3. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.

4. Openness Factor: 3 percent.

5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 414
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 5

2.5 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F:

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch.

Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.

C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except as follows:

1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances,and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Roller Shade Locations: As indicated on Drawings.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 415
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 1
SECTION 12 3600

COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Quartz agglomerate countertops and backsplashes.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 22 4100 "Residential Plumbing Fixtures" for non-integral sinks and plumbing fittings.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

3. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.

4. Chain-of-Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor.

6. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

7. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

8. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

1. Show locations and details of joints.

2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 416
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 2
E. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.

2. One full-size quartz agglomerate countertop, with front edge and backsplash, 8 by 10 inches, of construction and in configuration specified.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For material countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

D. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver countertops only after casework and supports on which they will be installed have been completed in installation areas.

B. Store countertops in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

C. Keep finished surfaces of countertops covered with protective covering during handling and installation.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 417
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 3

1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

B. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

D. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

E. Low-emitting requirements – Composite Wood:

F. Certified Wood: Wood shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004.

G. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.2 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with ICPA SS-1, except for composition.

1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed on Finish Legend, or comparable products and price groups by one of the following:
a. Zodiac by E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company
b. Quartz by Caesarstone Quartz

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 418
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 4
c. Quartz by Cambria.

2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

2.3 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of interior architectural woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

2. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI 208.2
a. Basis of Design: "Medite II," 3/4 inch thick, by SierraPine Composite Solutions, Roseville, CA.

3. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded

4. Hardwood Veneer Plywood: HPVA HP-1, Non-toxic, urea formaldehyde free: with soybased adhesive:
a. Basis of Design: Purebond by Columbia Forest Products Inc.

5. Fire Rated Plywood FR plywood at secure walls: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 sheathing.

6. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1 1/8 inches and as indicated.

2.4 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION
A. Fabricate countertops according to manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Custom.

B. Configuration:

1. Front: Straight, chamfered at top.

2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.

3. End Splash: Matching backsplash.

C. Countertops: 3/4-inch-thick, material with front edge built up with same material.

D. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch-thick, material.

E. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.

F. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field.

1. Joint Locations: Not within 18 inches of a sink or cooktop and not where a countertop section less than 36 inches long would result, unless unavoidable.

2. Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to maintain alignment of surfaces at joints. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness of splines to provide snug fit. Provide at least three splines in each joint.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 419
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 5
G. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. a. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening.

2. Counter-Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.

3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.

2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Adhesive: Product recommended by manufacturer.

B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to receive countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets.

Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

D. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

E. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

1. Install metal splines in kerfs in countertop edges at joints where indicated. Fill kerfs with adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position.

2. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 420
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 6
F. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

G. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing.

Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.

H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

1. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.

I. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."

END OF SECTION

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 421
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-1
SECTION 21 00 00

FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1DESIGN-BUILD SUMMARY
A. Work included in 21 00 00 applies to Division 21, Fire Suppression work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits and incidentals to make fire suppression systems ready for Owner's use for proposed project.

1.2 DESIGN-BUILD INSTRUCTIONS
A. This document is issued to give Bidders a basis for preparing a proposal to design and install a complete Fire Suppression system for this project.

B. Alternates to this Document may be offered as a separate proposal.

1.3 DESIGN-BUILD APPROACH
A. Use this Specification for design/engineering requirements, workmanship and materials or construction. Utilize design-build concept throughout construction phase of project.

B. Investigate and be apprised of applicable codes, rules, and regulations as enforced by AHJ.

C. Visit the Site of the proposed construction. Verify and inspect the existing site to determine conditions that affect this work.

1.4 DESIGN-BUILD CRITERIA
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Contents of Section apply to Division 21, Fire Suppression Specifications. Requirements of Section are a minimum for Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections, unless otherwise stated in each Section, in which case that Section's requirements take precedence.

B. Reference Basis of Design narrative document.

C. Fire Suppression Design Criteria: Refer to individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections for fire suppression system design criteria.

D. Fire Suppression Equipment: Refer to individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections for fire suppression equipment requirements.

1.5 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work included in 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements applies to Division 21, Fire Suppression work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of fire protection systems for proposed project.

B. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of work.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 422
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-2
C. Definitions:

1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation.

3. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installation, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as required to complete Item of work furnished.

4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent," substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted Item.

5. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities, including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's Authorized Representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance.

1.6 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Content of Section applies to Division 21, Fire Suppression Contract Documents.

B. Related Work:

1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to:
a. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
b. Drawings
c. Addenda
d. Owner/Architect Agreement
e. Owner/Contractor Agreement
f. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits

1.7 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections and those listed in this Section.

B. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from:

1. State of California:
a. CBC - California Building Code
b. CEC - California Electrical Code
c. CEC T24 - California Energy Code Title 24
d. CFC - California Fire Code
e. CMC - California Mechanical Code
f. CPC - California Plumbing Code
g. CSFM - California State Fire Marshal
C. Reference standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the latest adopted editions from:

1. ABA - Architectural Barriers Act

2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act

3. AHRI - Air-Conditioning Heating & Refrigeration Institute

4. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

5. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 423
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-3

6. ASCE-7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

7. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers

8. ASHRAE Guideline 0, the Commissioning Process

9. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers

10. ASPE - American Society of Plumbing Engineers

11. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering

12. ASTM - ASTM International

13. AWWA - American Water Works Association

14. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations

15. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency

16. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories

17. FCC - Federal Communications Commission

18. FM - FM Global

19. FM Global - FM Global Approval Guide

20. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Official

21. ICC - International Code Council

22. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission

23. ICC-ESR - International Code Council Evaluation Service Reports

24. HI - Hydraulic Institute Standards

25. ISO - International Organization for Standardization

26. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society

27. NEC - National Electric Code

28. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association

29. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association:
a. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems b. NFPA 25 - Standard for Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems
c. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
d. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

30. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association

31. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation

32. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration

33. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc.

34. TIMA - Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association

35. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

D. See Division 21, Fire Suppression individual Sections for additional references.

1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures as well as specific individual Division 21, Fire Suppression sections.

B. Provide drawings in format and software release equal to the design documents. Drawings to be the same sheet size and scale as the Contract Documents.

C. "No Exception Taken" constitutes that review is for general conformance with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given. Any action is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and quantity and will confirm and correlate at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of the work with that of all other trades, and the satisfactory performance of the work.

D. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format only. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one file per division containing October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 424
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-4
one bookmarked PDF file with each bookmark corresponding to each Specification Section.

Arrange bookmarks in ascending order of Specification Section number. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all transmissions/submissions.

E. Submit shop drawings, calculations and product data sheets as one complete stand-alone package to AHJ, Owner's insurance underwriter and Engineer.

F. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

G. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what differences, if any, exist between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the Specifications and Drawings.

1. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents.

2. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for products, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided. Reference Division 21, Fire Suppression specification Sections for specific Item required in product data submittal outside of these requirements.

3. Provide pump curves, operation characteristics, capacities, ambient noise criteria, etc. for equipment.

4. For vibration isolation of equipment, list make and model selected with operating load and deflection. Indicate frame type where required. Submit manufacturer's product data.

5. See Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections for additional submittal requirements outside of these requirements.

H. Maximum of two reviews provided of complete submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; bear costs of additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to Contractor without review.

I. Resubmission Requirements: Make corrections or changes in submittals as required, and in consideration of Engineer’s comments. Identify Engineer’s comments and provide an individual response to each of the Engineer’s comments. Cloud changes in the submittals and further identify changes which are in response to Engineer’s comments.

J. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet ASCE 7-16 requirements for non-structural components. Provide engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification. Equipment Importance Factor as specified in Division 01 and in Structural documents.

K. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 21, Fire Suppression coordination documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26, Electrical and Division 28, Electronic Safety submittals.

L. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 425
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-5
M. Substitutions and Variation from Basis of Design:

1. The Basis of Design designated product establishes the qualities and characteristics for the evaluation of any comparable products by other listed acceptable manufacturers if included in this Specification or included in an approved Substitution Request as judged by the Design Professional.

2. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor is required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base Bid, including resulting charges for work performed under other Divisions, will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals". For any product marked "or approved equivalent", a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation.

N. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide coordinated Shop Drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, equipment and piping layout, pipe layout, hanger layout, sway brace layout, seismic restraints, sway brace calculations, drains, location of drain discharge, risers, valves, details, water test information, physical device layout plans, and control wiring diagrams.

Reference individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections for additional requirements for shop drawings outside of these requirements.

2. Shop Drawings and hydraulics calculations, sway brace calculations, trapeze hanger calculations, and the like, to be prepared under the direct supervision and control of a Professional Engineer competent to do such work and licensed in the state of California.

Drawings and calculations to bear the seal and wet signature of the Professional Engineer.

3. Provide Shop Drawings which indicate information required by NFPA 13. Include room names and fire sprinkler occupancy hazard classifications.

4. Provide Shop Drawings illustrating information for Hydraulic Information Sign for each hydraulic remote area calculated.

5. Utilizing the Reflected Ceiling backgrounds, provide Shop Drawings illustrating locations of fire sprinklers and piping.

6. Utilizing the Structural backgrounds, provide Shop Drawings illustrating locations and types of hangers and sway braces.

7. Provide Shop Drawings illustrating each type of hanger, including fasteners to structure.

8. Provide Shop Drawings illustrating each type of branchline restraint and sway brace, including length of sway brace member, sway brace fittings, minimum and maximum angles from vertical of sway brace member, method of attachment to structure, size, length and embedment of attachment to structure and size and type of structural member to which sway brace will be attached. Number each type of restraint and sway brace.

Indicate on Drawings locations of each type of numbered restraint and sway brace.

9. Provide details for any hanger, attachment, or sway brace to be attached to any I-joist, structural insulated panels (SIPs), cross laminated timber, and similar engineered structural products according to the specifications of the engineered product manufacturer.

10. Provide Shop Drawings illustrating information for Sprinkler System General Information Sign.

11. Shop Drawings to include a cross-sectional view that shows the sprinkler heads and piping in relation to the building's architectural and structural information. View to be chosen based on a location that will display the most information.

12. When required, provide Coordination Drawings.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 426
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-6

13. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation for approval prior to installation.

14. Provide details of hanger, sway bracing and branch line restraint attachments to structure and to piping. Include details on the size and load capacities of fasteners. Provide verification of the structural capacity to withstand seismic load.

15. Provide sway bracing calculations on drawings showing horizontal seismic design load and requirements, with indication of zone of influence for each bracing location.

16. Provide a schedule of sway bracing type, size, and design criteria, including length, angle from vertical, and load capacities.

17. Clearly indicate the elevation of the highest sprinkler in relation to the elevation of the flow test pressure gauge monitor hydrant.

18. Provide details of flexible sprinkler hose fitting per manufacturer's schedule of equivalent feet used in hydraulic calculations, showing device length, maximum number of 90- degree bends and expected radius of bends.

19. Provide a schedule of signage to be installed at each flexible sprinkler hose fitting.

20. On the drawings, provide a list of number, model, temperature, sprinkler Identification number, manufacturer, orifice, deflector type, thermal sensitivity and pressure rating, quantity of each type to be contained in the spare sprinkler cabinet and the issue date or revision date of the list.

21. Spare sprinkler head cabinet size indicating the number of spare sprinkler head to be contained therein.

O. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual Sections.

P. Resubmission Requirements:

1. Make any corrections or change in submittals when required. Provide submittals as specified. The Engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret the Contractor's submittals. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment. Clearly indicate changes on Drawings and cloud changes in the submittals.

2. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exceptions taken or make "corrections as noted".

Q. Operation and Maintenance Manuals/Owner's Instructions:

1. Submit, at one time, electronic files (PDF format) of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or Item requiring servicing.

Include valve charts. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment.
a. Include copies of certificates of code authority acceptance, code-required acceptance tests; test reports and certificates.
b. Include Warranty per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Sections.
c. Catalog description of each Item of equipment actually installed on job. d. Instructions for operation and maintenance of fire suppression systems composed of operating instructions, maintenance instructions and manufacturer's literature as follows:
1) Testing and Maintenance Schedule Chart: Provide an 8-1/2- by 11-inch typewritten list of each item of installed equipment requiring testing inspection, lubrication or service, describing and scheduling performance of maintenance.
2) Manufacturer's Literature: Provide copies of manufacturer's instructions for operation and maintenance of fire suppression equipment, including replacement parts list with name and address of nearest distributor. Mark October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 427
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-7
each copy with equipment identification label as listed in equipment schedule, i.e. F-5 etc.
e. Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. f. Include Record Drawings.
g. Include copy of water supply flow test used as basis for hydraulic calculations. h. Include hydraulic calculations and sway brace calculations. i. Include Contractor’s Material and Test Certificates for Aboveground Piping. j. Include a copy of NFPA 25.
k. Include a copy of valve charts and whether normally open or normally closed. l. Include a copy of drain, auxiliary, and low point drains charts. m. Include a copy of the list to be included in the spare sprinkler head box. n. Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project.
o. Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes, and quantities relevant to each piece of equipment: i.e. belts, motors, lubricants, and filters. p. Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and sub-assemblies.
q. Include copy of startup and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. r. Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format. Contractor must arrange for additional reviews; Contractor to bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.

2. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual Sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements, Article titled "Demonstration".

3. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, letter of conformance and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.

R. Record Drawings:

1. Maintain at site at least one set of Drawings for recording “As-constructed” conditions.

Indicate on Drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements, location of cleanouts, and location of concealed mechanical Item. Include items changed by field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions.

2. Record Drawings are to include equipment and fixture/connection schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project.

3. At completion of project, input changes to original project on CAD Drawings and make one set of black-line drawings created from CAD Files in version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit CAD Files and drawings upon substantial completion.

4. Invert elevations and dimensioned locations for water services and drainage piping below grade extending to 5-feet outside building line.

5. Record Drawings to include site information or reference site information for complete understanding of the fire protection system between the building and the point of connection to the water supply and location of flow test pressure hydrants.

6. See Division 21, Fire Suppression individual Sections for additional items to include in Record Drawings.

S. Calculations: Submit hydraulic and sway brace and the like calculations.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 428
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-8

1. Hydraulic Calculations:
a. Include friction losses between the hydraulically most remote design area and the hydrant flow test pressure hydrant.
b. Hydraulic calculations to be performed on a nationally recognized fire sprinkler hydraulic calculation computer program, with cover sheets in the format required by the latest edition of NFPA 13. Hydraulic calculations performed “by hand” or not on a nationally recognized fire sprinkler hydraulic calculations computer program will be returned without review by Engineer.
c. Provide one or more hydraulic calculations for each hydraulically most remote area.
d. Where it is not obvious which area is most hydraulically remote, perform and submit for review additional hydraulic calculations proving the hydraulically most remote area.
e. For grid systems, either provide “peaked” hydraulic calculations, or provide two additional sets of hydraulic calculations for each hydraulically most remote area. f. Include pressure losses between the highest sprinkler and the elevation of the pressure gauge monitor hydrant of the flow test.
g. Include friction loss for flexible branch line connectors per manufacturer's schedule of equivalent feet for device length, maximum number of bends and expected radius of bends.
h. When flexible sprinkler hose fittings are added to an existing system, provide hydraulic calculations verifying the design flow rate will be achieved." i. For Future Tenant Improvement Spaces: Include in hydraulic calculations friction loss allowances for future installation of flexible sprinkler head connectors so that flexible connectors may be installed in the future without revisions to the overhead system.

2. Sway Brace Calculations:
a. Sway brace calculations utilizing a proprietary computer calculation program only used for the sway brace components supported by that manufacturer. For example, only “manufacturer X” sway brace components, and not those of another manufacturer, may be calculated on a "manufacturer X” sway brace computer calculation program.
b. Provide seismic calculations for any sway brace to be attached to any I-joist, structural insulated panels (SIPs), cross laminated timber, and similar engineered structural products according to the specifications of the I-joist manufacturer.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local, State and Federal codes, and other applicable laws and regulations. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations.

B. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement or construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes, higher quality and/or capacity take precedence.

C. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis of Design manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every Item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (i.e., piping) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis of Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 429
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-9
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work.

E. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

F. Provide products that are UL listed.

G. Piping Insulation products to contain less than 0.1 percent by weight PBDE in all insulating materials.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01, General Requirements and the General Conditions.

Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

1.11 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to construction, prepare and submit coordinated layout drawings (composite drawings), to coordinate installation and location of ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, fire sprinklers, fire alarm, plumbing, cable trays, lights, and electrical services. Composite Drawings show services on single sheet. Key Drawings to structural column identification system. Prior to completion of Drawings, coordinate proposed installation with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including plumbing, HVAC, electrical, fire alarm ceiling suspension and tile systems, etc.), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling and finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence.

B. Prepare Drawings as follows:

1. Provide drawings in CAD Format. CAD format release equal to design documents.

Drawings to be same sheet size and scale as Contract Drawings and indicate location, size and elevation above finished floor of equipment and distribution systems.

2. Review and revise, as necessary, section cuts in Contract Drawings after verification of field conditions.

3. Indicate fire protection system piping including fittings, hangers, access panels, valves, and bottom of pipe elevations above finished floor.

4. Indicate inverts and provision for piping that must be graded to have right-of-way over more flexible Item. Drawings also to indicate proposed ceiling grid and lighting layout as shown on electrical drawings, architectural reflected ceiling drawings and HVAC equipment, ductwork and piping. Drawings to indicate proposed and identified structural members to which hangers and sway braces will be attached as shown on structural drawings.

5. Incorporate Addenda Item and change orders.

6. Provide additional coordination as requested by other trades.

C. Advise Architect in event conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise AArchitect of conflict.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 430
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-10
D. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation related thereto.

E. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer, including but not limited to sprinkler heads, pipe, fittings, hangers and bracing materials.

2.2 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL, ETL, FM, ICC-ES, and CSFM listed and labeled for their intended fire protection function or be approved by State, County, and City authorities prior to procurement and installation.

B. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.

C. Hazardous Materials:

1. Comply with local, State of California, and Federal regulations relating to hazardous materials.

2. Comply with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements for this project relating to hazardous materials.

3. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance. If hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner and Architect. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under separate contract.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Install equipment requiring access (i.e. drains, control operators, valves, motors, engines, pumps, controllers, air compressors, gauges, fill cups, tanks, cleanouts and the like) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage.

C. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions.

Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing, and coordination with other trades and disciplines.

D. Firestopping:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 431
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-11

1. Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

2. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections and coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping, ductwork and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM International E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

E. Pipe Installation:

1. Provide installation of piping systems coordinated to account for expansion and contraction of piping materials and building as well as anticipated settlement or shrinkage of building. Install work to prevent damage to piping, equipment, and building and its contents. Provide piping offsets, loops, expansion joints, sleeves, anchors or other means to control pipe movement and minimize forces on piping. Verify anticipated settlement and/or shrinkage of building with Project Structural Engineer. Verify construction phasing, type of building construction products and rating coordinating installation of piping systems.

2. Include provisions for servicing and removal of equipment without dismantling piping.

F. Plenums: Provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums.

Immediately notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancy.

3.2 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, Structural documents, and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Provide fire suppression equipment and piping, both hanging and base mounted, with mounting connection points of sufficient strength to resist lateral seismic forces equal to lateral seismic forces as determined by building code and NFPA 13 calculations, whichever is more demanding.

C. See Structural Drawings for seismic design criteria for sway bracing and seismic restraint.

D. Earthquake resistant designs for Fire Protection (Division 21) equipment and distribution, i.e. fire sprinkler systems, fire standpipe systems, fire pumps, fire pump controllers, fire tanks, clean agent fire suppression systems, etc. to conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority.

E. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction having authority.

F. Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Engineer of seismic bracing and seismic movement assemblies for piping, equipment, tanks, pumps controllers and the like. Submit shop drawings along with equipment submittals.

G. Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Engineer of seismic flexible joints for piping and crossing building expansion or seismic joints. Submit Shop Drawings along with seismic bracing details.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 432
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-12
H. Provide details of flexible drops for sprinklers in conformance with Building Code and ASCE-7 requirements of ceilings. Coordinate with Architectural and Structural Drawings and Specifications.

I. Piping: Per NFPA 13, ASCE-7 and local requirements.

J. Equipment:

1. Per "Seismic Restraints Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" latest edition published by SMACNA, ASCE 7 and local requirements.

2. Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of fire protection equipment during an earthquake.

3.3 REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
A. Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that they may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation:

1. Prior to covering walls.

2. Prior to ceiling cover/installation.

3. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ.

4. When mains or branchlines are to be permanently concealed by construction or insulation systems.

5. When fire suppression systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ.

C. Bear responsibility and cost to make piping accessible, to expose concealed lines, or to demonstrate acceptability of the system. If Contractor fails to notify Architect at times prescribed above, costs incurred by removal of such work are the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Final Punch: Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.4 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections and the following:

1. During remodeling or addition to existing structures, while existing structure is occupied, current services to remain intact until new construction, facilities or equipment is installed.

2. Prior to changing over to new service, verify that every Item is thoroughly prepared.

Install new piping, and wiring to point of connection.

3. Coordinate transfer time to new service with Owner. If required, perform transfer during off peak hours. Once changeover is started, pursue to its completion to keep interference at a minimum. If overtime is required, there will be no allowance made by Owner for extra expense for such overtime or shift work.

4. During entire time system, or part thereof, is not operational, provide a firewatch per Fire Code, including a watchperson whose sole duty is to watch for and report fires.

5. Organize work to minimize duration of power interruption.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 433
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-13

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Confirm Cutting and Patching requirements in Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections and the following:

1. Cutting and patching performed under Division 21, Fire Suppression includes, but is not limited to:
a. Cutting and patching of plaster or partitions.
b. Cutting and patching of finished ceilings.

2. Perform cutting and patching by skilled craftsmen in trade of work to be performed. Fill holes which are cut oversized for completed work. Match refinished areas with existing adjacent finish in a manner acceptable to Architect.

3. When masonry to concrete construction must be penetrated, provide a steel pipe sleeve in opening and grout in place in a neat manner. Leave grout surface to match existing finish. Provide escutcheons. If sleeves are not provided, core drill penetrations.

4. Locate concealed utilities to eliminate possible service interruption or damage.

5. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

6. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by Project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to Project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval. Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s).

7. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section will be performed by skilled craftspeople of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work.

8. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting.

Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout.

9. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Patch and repair specifically where existing items have been removed. This includes repairing and painting walls, ceilings, etc. where existing conduit and devices are removed as part of this project. Where alterations disturb lawns, landscaping, paving, and walks, surfaces to be repaired, refinished and left in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work.

10. Repair mutilation of building around pipes, equipment, hangers, and braces.

3.6 EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY
A. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing at no additional cost to Owner.

3.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections and the following:

1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage and deterioration.

Store materials in original containers which identify manufacturer, name, brand and model numbers on site inside building or protected from weather, sun, dirt and October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 434
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-14
construction dust. Insulation and lining that becomes wet from improper storage and handling to be replaced before installation. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be replaced before installation.

2. Protect equipment and pipe to avoid damage. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs.

Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.

3. Protect bright finished shafts, bearing housings and similar items until in service.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment and test systems, demonstrate to Owner's Authorized Representative, Architect and Engineer that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required.

Provide field instruction to Owner's Maintenance Staff as specified in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified person at time approved by Owner to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations.

D. Prior to acceptance of work and during time designated by Architect, provide necessary qualified personnel to operate system for a period of two hours.

E. Instruct the Owner in the operation of the sprinkler system, including main valve position (open or closed) recognition, system drainage, system testing, dry pipe valve reset and the relation to the fire alarm system.

F. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment, test systems to demonstrate to Owner's Authorized Representative and Architect that equipment is furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications.

3.9 CLEANING
A. Confirm Cleaning requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Upon completion of installation, except for sprinklers, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work.

C. Sprinklers may not be cleaned except for vacuuming in a manner in which no part of the sprinkler is touched by the vacuuming equipment. Replace sprinklers which bear traces of foreign substances with sprinklers of same model, temperature, K-factor, orifice, finish, style, orientation, and the like.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 435
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-15

3.10 INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to vibration isolators. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

C. Start-up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, in the presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.

Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. Provide pump impellers to obtain Basis of Design design capacities.

D. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment and piping.

3.11 PAINTING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 09, Finishes.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections and the following:

1. Ferrous Metal: After completion of fire protection work, thoroughly clean and paint exposed supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces, i.e., hangers, hanger rods, equipment stands, with one coat of black asphalt varnish for exterior or black enamel for interior, suitable for hot surfaces.

2. After acceptance by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), in a mechanical room, on roof or other exposed areas, machinery and equipment not painted with enamel to receive two coats of primer and one coat of rustproof enamel, colors as selected by Architect.

3. Structural Steel: Repair damage to structural steel finishes or finishes of other materials damaged by cutting, welding or patching to match original.

4. Piping: Clean, primer coat and paint exposed piping on roof or at other exterior locations with two coats paint suitable for metallic surfaces and exterior exposures. Color selected by Architect.

5. Covers: Covers such as vault covers and the like will be furnished with finishes which resist corrosion and rust.

3.12 DEMOLITION
A. Confirm Demolition requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 02, Existing Conditions.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Sections in Division 21, Fire Suppression and the following:

1. Scope:
a. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and adjustments to fire protection system required to meet code, and accommodate installation of new work.
b. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access or access to different areas. c. Existing Conditions: Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities. Replace damaged Item with new material to match existing. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 436
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-16

2. Equipment and Piping: Unless otherwise directed, equipment, piping, or fittings being removed as part of demolition process are Owner's property. Remove other Item not scheduled to be reused or relocated from job site as directed by Owner.

3. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove exposed, unused piping to behind finished surfaces (floor, walls, ceilings, etc.). Cap piping and patch surfaces to match surrounding finish.

4. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove unused equipment, fittings, rough-ins, and connectors. Removal is to be to a point behind finished surfaces (floors, walls, and ceilings).

5. Coordinate demolition of existing fire suppression systems with Contractor. Where applicable or possible, portions of fire suppression demolition work may be performed by Contractor. Verify with local AHJ as to limitations of demolition by others and not fire suppression trades. Coordinate extent of demolition of fire suppression work to be done by others and supervise this work. No extra costs will be approved by replacement of systems due to improper or excessive demolition.

3.13 ACCEPTANCE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Sections in Division 21, Fire Suppression. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following:

1. Testing reports including Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping, Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Private Fire Service Mains, Fire pump acceptance test data report, and the like.

2. Cleaning

3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

4. Training of Operating Personnel

5. Record Drawings

6. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates

7. Start-up/Test Document and Commissioning Reports

8. Letter of Conformance

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Confirm Field Quality Control requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Upon completion of installation of equipment, sprinklers, hose valves and piping and after units are water pressurized, test system to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.

When possible, correct malfunctioning items at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new Item and proceed with retesting.

C. Inspect each installed Item for damage to finish. If feasible, restore and match finish to original, except fire sprinklers, at site; otherwise, remove Item and replace with new Item. Feasibility and match to be judged by Architect. Remove cracked or dented Item and replace with new Item.

D. Fire sprinklers may not be reused, or cleaned, except for dusting. Replace damaged, field painted, oversprayed, overcoated or field coated sprinklers with new sprinklers of same manufacturer, model, finish, K-factor and performance characteristics. Where identical October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 437
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-17
replacement sprinklers are not available, provide sprinklers of similar finish, style, K-factor and performance characteristics.

3.15 LETTER OF CONFORMANCE
A. Provide Letter of Conformance and copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties with a statement that fire suppression items were installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, UL listings and FM Global approvals.

B. Include Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

3.16 ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS
A. Where equipment motors are to be electrically interlocked with other equipment for simultaneous operation, utilize fire protection equipment wiring diagrams to coordinate with electrical systems so that proper wiring of equipment involved is affected.

3.17 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING
A. Prior to connection of piping to existing piping or utilities, field verify existing conditions and exact sizes and locations of existing piping.

B. Provide additional offsets, transitions, joints, cut-ins, and replace portions of existing as required to facilitate connections of new.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 438
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-1
SECTION 21 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Aboveground Black Steel Pipe and Fittings

2. Wall and Floor Penetrations and Sleeves

3. Hangers and Supports

4. Struts and Strut Clamps

5. Sway Braces and Restraints

6. Anchors and Attachments

7. Valves

8. Signs

9. Drains

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 21, Fire Suppression and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

B. In addition, reference the following:

1. Division 22, Plumbing

2. Division 23, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning

3. Division 26, Electrical

4. Division 28, Electronic Safety

5. Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements

6. Section 21 13 00, Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. Meet requirements of ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, by American Society of Civil Engineers, latest adopted edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Material and Equipment: Listed for its intended fire protection use in current UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory, or UL Online Certifications Directory for Fire Protection, FM Global Approval Guide, and International Code Council Evaluation Service Reports.

All material and equipment to be new and from a current manufacturer.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 439
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-2

2. Provide per AHJ requirements.

3. References to product Specifications for materials are listed according to accepted ANSI, ASTM, ASME, AWWA and other base standards. Materials to meet latest approved versions of these standards.

4. Fire Suppression Screw-Thread Connections: Comply with local fire department/fire marshal regulations for sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment to fire department connections.

5. Manufacturers: Unless an item is marked "No substitutions", submit substitution request for materials of other than named manufacturers.

6. Noise and Vibration:
a. Install vibration isolators and measures required to prevent noise and vibration from being transmitted to occupied areas. Select equipment to operate within noise coefficient (NC) design level for particular type of installation in relation to its location.
b. After installation, make proper adjustments to reduce noise and vibration to acceptable levels as defined by Architect.
c. In acoustically sensitive areas, design system in a manner that minimizes the number of wall penetrations.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 FLOW TEST
A. Provide materials and labor for a new water supply test on the closest nearby fire hydrants per NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Base hydraulic calculations on new flow test.

1.8 SYSTEM IMPAIRMENT
A. When returning a water-based fire protection system to service after impairment or control valve closure, verify the system is in working order by performing a main drain test per NFPA 25.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Aboveground Black Steel Pipe and Fittings:

1. Pipe:
a. Bull Moose Tube
b. Wheatland Tube Co.
c. Youngstown Tube Co.
d. Tex-Tube Co.
e. State Pipe and Supply, Inc.
f. Or approved equivalent

2. Fittings, Mechanical and Grooved Couplings:
a. Victaulic
b. Gruvlok
c. Shurjoint Piping Products Inc.
d. Smith-Cooper International
e. Tyco Fire & Building Products
f. Viking Corp.
g. ARGCO
h. Anvil International
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 440
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-3
i. Dixon Valve & Coupling
j. Or approved equivalent.

3. Fittings, Threaded:
a. Ward Mfg.
b. Anvil International
c. Smith-Cooper International
d. Aegis Technologies
e. Or approved equivalent.

4. Fittings, Rubber Gasketed:
a. Victaulic
b. Anvil International
c. AnvilStar
d. EBAA Iron, Inc.
e. Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc.
f. Smith-Cooper International
g. Tyco Fire & Building Products
h. Viking Corp.
i. Ward Mfg.
j. ARGCO
k. Dixon Valve & Coupling
l. Or approved equivalent.

5. Fittings, Welded:
a. Anvil International
b. Shurjoint Piping Products Inc.
c. Smith-Cooper International
d. State Pipe & Supply, Inc.
e. Or approved equivalent.

6. Fittings, Flanged:
a. Victaulic
b. United Brand Fittings
c. U.S. Pipe
d. Anvil S.P.F.
e. Iowa Fittings Co.
f. Tyco Fire Products
g. Or approved equivalent.

B. Wall and Floor Penetrations and Sleeves:

1. ARGCO

2. Fire Protection Products Inc. (FPPI)

3. Or approved equivalent.

C. Hangers and Supports:

1. Cooper B-Line Tolco

2. Anvil International

3. ITW Buildex Sammys

4. Erico International

5. PHD Mfg. Inc.

6. Or approved equivalent.

D. Struts and Strut Clamps:

1. Cooper B-Line Tolco

2. Or approved equivalent.

E. Sway Braces and Restraints:

1. Cooper B-Line Tolco

2. Anvil International
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 441
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-4

3. Erico International

4. PHD Mfg. Inc.

5. Or approved equivalent.

F. Anchors and Attachments:

1. Attachments in concrete as specified or described by structural. If not specified or described by structural, then as follows:
a. Hilti
b. Powers
c. Simpson Strong-Tie
d. DeWalt
e. Or approved equivalent.

2. Wood:
a. Cooper B-Line Tolco
b. Anvil International
c. Elco Construction Products
d. Erico International
e. ITW Buildex Sammys
f. Or approved equivalent.

3. Steel:
a. Cooper B-Line Tolco
b. Anvil International
c. Elco Construction Products
d. Erico International
e. ITW Buildex Sammys
f. Or approved equivalent.

G. Valves:

1. Butterfly Valves:
a. Victaulic
b. Nibco
c. Tyco
d. Use lug body next to pumps; Nibco.
e. Reliable
f. Or approved equivalent.

2. Automatic Air Release Valve:
a. Potter Electric Signal Co.
b. Or approved equivalent.

3. Ball Valve:
a. Victaulic
b. Apollo Valves
c. Fire Protection Products Inc. (FPPI)
d. Nibco
e. Or approved equivalent.

H. Signs:

1. Tyco Fire Products

2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler

3. Viking Corp.

4. ARGCO

5. Or approved equivalent.

I. Drains:

1. Reference Aboveground Black Steel Pipe and Fittings.

2. AGF

3. Victaulic
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 442
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-5

4. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 ABOVEGROUND BLACK STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Wet Pipe Systems:

1. Pipe Size 2-inch Diameter and Smaller: ASTM A53, ASTM A135, or ASTM A795; minimum of Schedule 40 when installed with threaded fittings, minimum Schedule 10 when installed with grooved fittings.

2. Pipe Size 2-1/2-inch Diameter and Larger: ASTM A53, ASTM A135, or ASTM A795; minimum of Schedule 10.

3. Exposed pipe 8-feet or less above finished floor: A minimum of Schedule 40.

B. Joints:

1. Threaded, flanged or bevel welded.

2. Piping installed in plenums or shafts to have welded joints.

C. Fittings:

1. Threaded:
a. Malleable Iron: Class 150 and Class 300, ANSI B16.3. b. Cast Iron: Class 125 and 250, ANSI B16.3.

2. Flanged:
a. Cast iron; Class 125 and 250, ASME B16.1.
b. Raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.

3. Welded:
a. Carbon Steel: Long radius, standard weight or extra strong. b. Factory Wrought Steel Buttweld Fittings: ASME B16.9. c. Buttwelding Ends for Pipe, Valves, Flanges and Fittings: ASME B16.25. d. Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures: ASTM A234.
e. Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. f. Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welded and Threaded: ASME B16.11.

4. Mechanical Fittings and Grooved Couplings:
a. Couplings: UL 213, AWWA C606, ASTM A536 ductile iron or ASTM A47 malleable iron, with enamel finish and grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved couplings. Synthetic-rubber gasket with central-cavity, pressure-responsive design and ASTM A183 carbon-steel bolts and nuts.
b. FM Global approved.

D. Anti-Microbial Coating: Factory-applied coating to inhibit corrosion from microbiological organisms.

2.3 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVES
A. Below Grade and High Water Table Areas: Waterproof elastomeric compound.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping.

B. Hangers: Ferrous.

C. Hanger Rods: Zinc electroplated carbon steel.

D. Finishes: Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 443
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-6
E. Materials:

1. Use carbon steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.

2. Use stainless steel hangers, rods and attachments for corrosive environment applications. Examples of corrosive environment applications include, but are not limited to: swimming pools and spas, pool and spa equipment rooms and adjacent areas, chemical rooms, kidney dialysis areas, marine and beach environments, commercial laundries and the like.

2.5 STRUTS AND STRUT CLAMPS
A. Electro-galvanized steel.

B. Designed for supporting pipe runs from strut supports.

C. Stainless steel for corrosive environment applications. Examples of corrosive environment applications include, but are not limited to: swimming pools and spas, pool and spa equipment rooms and adjacent areas, chemical rooms, kidney dialysis areas, marine and beach environments, commercial laundries and the like.

2.6 SWAY BRACES AND RESTRAINTS
A. Sway Bracing: From a single manufacturer and compatible with sway brace calculation program.

B. Stainless steel for corrosive environment applications. Examples of corrosive environment applications include, but are not limited to: swimming pools and spas, pool and spa equipment rooms and adjacent areas, chemical rooms, kidney dialysis areas, marine and beach environments, commercial laundries, and the like.

2.7 ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS
A. General: Anchor supports to masonry, concrete and block walls per anchoring system manufacturer’s recommendations, or as modified by project Structural Engineer.

B. Materials:

1. Ferrous.

2. Stainless steel for corrosive environment applications. Examples of corrosive environment applications include, but are not limited to: swimming pools and spas, pool and spa equipment rooms and adjacent areas, chemical rooms, kidney dialysis areas, marine and beach environments, commercial laundries, and the like.

C. Attachments in Concrete:

1. Suitable for hanging and bracing fire protection systems in concrete which is subject to cracking in a seismic event.

2. Seismic Design Areas C, D, E and F:
a. Compatible with International Code Council Evaluation Service Acceptance Criteria AC-193 and AC308 for expansion, screw and adhesive anchors. Meet requirements of ACI 355.2, Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and Commentary.
b. All models of Hilti HDI and ITW Red Head Multi-Set II anchors are not approved for attaching fire protection systems in Seismic Design Areas C, D, E and F. No Exceptions.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 444
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-7
D. ITW Buildex Sammys with FM Approval only are not allowed in certain seismic zones. Verify with FM that FM Approval is effective in project’s seismic zone.

2.8 VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron body with factory-installed tamper switches. Use lug body next to pumps.

B. Automatic Air-Release Valve for Wet Systems:

1. Rated to 175 psi.

2. Automatic float-type with shutoff mounted in a water retention pan.

3. Single set 24VAC@2A for electronic supervision.

4. Ball valve switch with cover tamper.

C. Ball Valves: Brass body, brass stem; forged brass ball disc.

2.9 SIGNS
A. Engraved plastic laminate or corrosion resistant metal sign or plastic equipment marker.

B. Corrosion-resistant chain or permanent adhesive.

2.10 DRAINS
A. Reference Aboveground Black Steel Pipe and Fittings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install in conformance with UL Listing, FM Approval or ICC-ES requirements and restrictions.

3.2 ABOVEGROUND BLACK STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Piping Routing:

1. Orient horizontal routes parallel with walls and beam lines.

2. Install piping as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations on Drawings or, if not indicated, install piping to provide the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing the building and its equipment.

3. Install piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. Prior to design and installation. obtain pre-approval by Architect for exposed piping.

4. In open-to-structure areas which are open to public view, route exposed piping to minimize visual impact. Obtain Architect's and Engineer's approval of exposed piping installation.

5. Coordinate installation with other trades. Route piping as required to avoid building structure, equipment, plumbing piping, HVAC piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures, electrical conduits and bus ducts and similar work. Final location of lighting will have priority over final sprinkler locations. Provide drains to trapped sections of system which result from such routing. Other trades take precedence for installation space.

6. Support piping adjacent to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of the building. Limit clearance to 2-inches wherever furring is indicated for concealment of piping. Allow for insulation thickness. Locate insulated piping to provide minimum 1-inch clearance outside insulation.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 445
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-8

7. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view by locating within column or beam enclosures, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal routes in solid partitions, except where approved.

8. General Electrical Equipment Clearances: Do not route piping through electrical rooms, transformer vaults, elevator equipment rooms and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures. Do not route piping above electric power or lighting panel, switchgear, low voltage panel, or similar electric device.

9. Rooms Protected by Alternative Systems: Route water filled and dry system piping around rooms protected by pre-action systems, clean agent systems, gaseous suppression systems and other alternative fire suppression systems.

10. Install pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.

11. Pitch all dry and pre-action system piping 1/4-inch per 10-feet for mains and 1/2-inch per 10-feet for branch lines, including pipe passing through both warm and cold areas.

B. Couplings:

1. Install where indicated on Drawings and on each side of pieces of equipment to permit easy removal of equipment.

2. Deburr cut edges.

C. Pipe Penetrations: Wire pipe cutout coupon at point of pipe penetration.

D. Pipe and Pipe Fittings:

1. Expansion and Flexibility: Install work with due regard for expansion and contraction to prevent damage to the piping, equipment, building and its contents. Provide piping offsets, loops, approved type expansion joints, sway bracing, wire restraints, vertical restraints, flexible couplings or other means to control pipe movement and to minimize pipe forces.

2. Coordinate support of pipe 4-inches and larger with Structural Engineer.

3. Provide clearances around piping per NFPA 13.

4. Install dry and pre-action welded pipe with welds facing vertically up, or where this is not possible, as close as possible to vertical between 46 degrees and 234 degrees. Intent is to minimize corrosion caused by moisture in the bottom of pipes.

3.3 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVES
A. Escutcheons: Install on exposed pipes passing through walls or floors.

1. Pipe Sleeves: Lay out work in advance of pouring concrete and furnish and set sleeves necessary to complete work.

2. Floor Sleeves: Provide sleeves on pipes passing through concrete or masonry construction. Extend sleeve 1-inch above finished floor. Caulk pipes passing through floor with nonshrinking fire and water resistant grout or approved equivalent caulking compound. Caulk/seal piping penetrations through fire rated building walls and floors with listed, fire-rated assemblies. Provide fire-rated assemblies per local AHJ requirements.

3. Wall Sleeves: Provide sleeves on pipes passing through concrete or masonry construction. Provide sleeve flush with finished face of wall. Caulk pipes passing through walls with non-shrinking caulking compound. Caulk/seal piping penetrations through fire rated building walls and floors with listed, fire-rated assemblies. Provide fire-rated assemblies per local AHJ requirements.

4. Beam Sleeves:
a. Coordinate with trades for locations of pipe sleeves in reinforced concrete and steel beams. Penetrations must be indicated on structural shop drawings. See Drawings and Specifications for specific sleeve location limitations. Pipe sleeve locations must be indicated on reinforced concrete and steel beam shop drawings. b. Field cutting of beams not allowed without written approval of structural engineer.

No extra costs allowed for failure to coordinate beam penetrations prior to reinforced concrete and steel beam shop drawing submittal.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 446
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-9

5. Penetrations in Fire-Rated Wall/Floor Assemblies:
a. Reference Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection. b. Coordinate with Drawings location of fire rated walls, ceilings and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping and equipment with approved firestopping material.
c. Provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to accommodate the penetration. Firestop voids between sleeve or core-drilled hole and pipe passing through to meet the requirements of ASTM E814 and NFPA. d. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports to conform to NFPA 13.

B. Provide adjustable hangers, inserts, brackets, clamps, supplementary steel and other accessory materials required for proper support of pipe lines and equipment. Provide supplementary materials for proper support and attachment of hangers.

3.5 STRUTS AND STRUT CLAMPS
A. Install per manufacturer's listed orientation.

3.6 SWAY BRACES AND RESTRAINTS
A. Locate per orientation and spacing as required by sway brace calculations.

B. Attach sway bracing directly to pipe or equipment being braced.

C. Do not attach sway bracing to bottom of truss members.

3.7 ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS
A. In post-tension construction, determine location of post-tension cables and install anchors to avoid contact or interference with post-tension cables. Coordinate with Structural.

B. Do not use powder-driven attachments.

C. Building Attachments and Inserts: Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves and flanges, for sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

D. Hanger and Support Attachments:

1. Concrete:
a. Where supports in slabs are required after concrete has been poured, provide drilled-in threaded inserts (mechanical-expansion anchors), installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
b. Install mechanical-expansion anchors after concrete is completely cured and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Where anchors are to be installed in post-tension construction, determine and avoid locations of post-tension cables prior to drilling.

2. Metal Floor Deck: Support hangers per UL Listing or FM Approval for selected concrete insert before pouring of concrete topping, or from beam clamps fastened to structural steel.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 447
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-10

3. Steel Joists: Support hangers from beam clamps fastened to bar joists or to auxiliary steel between bar joists as required.

4. C-Clamp Hangers: Do not attach to one side of double-angle bottom members.

5. Locate and install hangers, supports and attachments connecting to I-joists, structural insulated panels (SIPs), cross laminated timber and similar engineered structural products according to the structural product manufacturer specifications.

E. Make available to the Architect information required to verify the anchorage, sway bracing and restraint of fire protection systems.

3.8 VALVES
A. Inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace valve if leak persists.

B. Install valves where required for proper operation, testing and drainage. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. Install conveniently and accessibly located with reference to finished building for repairs, removal and service.

3.9 SIGNS
A. General Information Signs: Provide a general information sign used to determine system design basis and information relevant to the inspection, testing and maintenance requirements required by NFPA 25, Standard for the Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. Such general information is to be provided with a permanently marked weatherproof metal or rigid plastic sign, secured with corrosion-resistant wire, chain, or other acceptable means. Such signs are to be placed at each system control rise loop and auxiliary system control valve.

B. The sign is to include the following information:

1. Name and Location of the Facility Protected

2. Presence of High-Piled and/or Rack Storage

3. Maximum Height of Storage Planned

4. Flow Test Data

5. Location of Auxiliary Drains and Low Point Drains

6. Original Results of Main Drain Flow Test

7. Name of Installing Contractor or Designer

8. Indication of presence and location of other auxiliary systems.

3.10 DRAINS
A. Locate drain connections within 7-feet of floor. Provide piping capable of being fully drained.

B. Provide a drain vent at top of vertical drains. Coordinate with Division 22, Plumbing.

C. Coordinate location of auxiliary drains with Architect. Architect to approve location before drain is installed.

D. Protect drains from tampering and accidental operation.

E. Protect drain discharge at the exterior with a turned-down 45 degree elbow.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 448
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00-1
SECTION 21 13 00

FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Sprinklers

2. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fitting Assembly - For fire sprinklers in suspended ceilings which are supplied by a wet pipe system.

3. Wet System Air Vent

4. Spare Sprinkler Cabinet
B. This is a contractor designed system. Contact AHJ prior to bid to verify fire system requirements. Provide design compliant with codes as interpreted by AHJ.

C. Scope: Revision and extension of existing system to new and remodeled areas.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 21, Fire Suppression and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

B. In addition, reference the following:

1. Division 22, Plumbing

2. Division 23, Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning

3. Division 26, Electrical

4. Division 28, Electronic Safety

5. Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements

6. Section 21 05 00, Common Work Results for Fire Suppression

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Hydraulic calculations.

2. Sway brace calculations.

3. Details of sway bracing.

4. Details of interval and end of branch line restraints.

5. Details of flexible sprinkler hose fitting assembly, including number and radius of bends, corresponding to equivalent feet used in hydraulic calculations. Provide details of sign to be installed at each flexible sprinkler hose fitting assembly.

6. Details of oversized ceiling penetrations and oversized sprinkler escutcheons.

7. Trapeze hanger details and calculations, including size, length and material. Additionally, provide size, weight and number of pipes to be carried on the trapeze.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 449
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00-2

8. On submittal and As-Built drawings, provide text of sprinkler list to be installed in the spare sprinkler cabinet.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide coverage for entire building. Field verify field conditions prior to submittal of bid. Adjust bid to provide protection features in accordance with applicable codes and interpretations by AHJ. Provide design and installation based on more stringent requirements if this specification and AHJ requirements differ from Code.

B. Design Parameters:

1. Building Areas: Seating and Collaboration Zone.
a. Occupancy Classification: Light.

2. Building Areas: Prject Work Area, Craft Storage, 3D Printing, and similar. a. Occupancy Classification: Ordinary Group 1.

3. Design parameters above are NFPA 13 minimums. Provide increased design densities, design areas and hose allowances to meet requirements of AHJ.

C. Sprinkler system design to include a 10 percent pressure and flow cushion between system demand point and available water supplies.

D. Extend hydraulic calculations from hydraulically most remote design area back to location of pressure hydrant of flow test or effective point of water supply where characteristics of water supply are known.

1.8 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide extra sprinklers per code.

B. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type and metal storage cabinet in riser room.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Sprinklers:

1. Finished Areas:
a. Victaulic
b. Viking
c. Tyco
d. Reliable
e. Globe
f. Senju
g. Or approved equivalent.

2. Nonfinished Areas:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 450
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00-3
a. Victaulic
b. Viking
c. Tyco
d. Reliable
e. Globe
f. Or approved equivalent.

B. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fitting Assembly:

1. Victaulic; VicFlex.

2. Flexhead Industries

3. SprinkFLEX

4. ARGCO

5. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Company

6. Tyco Fire and Building Products

7. Viking Corporation

8. Or approved equivalent.

C. Wet System Air Vent:

1. Engineered Corrosion Solutions (ECS)

2. Potter Electric Signal Company; Model PAV

3. Or approved equivalent.

D. Spare Sprinkler Cabinet:

1. Victaulic

2. Fire Protection Products, Inc. (FPPI).

3. Tyco Fire & Building Products

4. Allied Rubber and Gasket Co.

5. Potter Roemer Fire Pro.

6. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 SPRINKLERS
A. Finished Areas:

1. Type: Glass-Bulb

2. Style: Recessed

3. Response: Quick-Response

4. Finish: White Polyester

5. Escutcheon: White Polyester
B. Nonfinished Areas:

1. Type: Glass-Bulb

2. Response: Quick-Response

3. Finish: Brass

2.3 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTING ASSEMBLY
A. Fully welded non-mechanical fittings, stainless steel, braided, leak-tested with minimum 1-inch true-bore internal corrugated hose diameter. 175 psi.

B. Ceiling Bracket: Galvanized steel, direct attachment type, with integrated snap-on clip ends and removable flexible hose attachment with set screw. FM1637, UL 2443.

C. Affix permanent sign, label or decal at each flexible sprinkler hose fitting assembly anchoring component limiting the relocation of the sprinkler.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 451
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00-4

2.4 WET SYSTEM AIR VENT
A. Brass, UL 2573 with ball valve supervisory switch.

2.5 SPARE SPRINKLER CABINET
A. NFPA 13 Systems: Sized to accommodate a minimum of two spare sprinklers of each Sprinkler Identification Number (SIN), manufacturer, model, orifice, deflector type, temperature and thermal sensitivity, or a minimum of six sprinklers for facilities having under 300 sprinklers, or a minimum of 12 sprinklers for facilities having 300 to 1000 sprinklers, or a minimum of 24 sprinklers for facilities having over 1000 sprinklers, whichever is more.

B. Welded steel with hinged steel cover.

C. Red enamel or polyester coated finish inside and out.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install per manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.

3.2 SPRINKLERS
A. Center sprinklers in center or quarter points of suspended ceiling tile.

B. Align sprinklers with architectural column lines, lighting, diffusers and other ceiling features. In unfinished ceilings, route piping to minimize visual impact. Sprinklers and piping not so aligned are to be removed and replaced at no additional cost to Owner.

3.3 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTING ASSEMBLY
A. Install flexible sprinkler hose fitting assemblies where pendent sprinkler heads are located in acoustic ceiling tiles.

B. Install with no more bends than are included in equivalent footage used in hydraulic calculations.

C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended bending radius as included in equivalent footage used in hydraulic calculations.

D. Affix permanent sign, label or decal at each flexible sprinkler hose fitting assembly anchoring component limiting the relocation of the sprinkler.

3.4 WET SYSTEM AIR VENT
A. Locate at a point in the system that will vent the most air.

B. Connect at top of pipe.

C. Locate so as not to interfere with sprinkler spray pattern.

D. Locate where it can be easily accessed for inspection and cleaning.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 452
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00-5
E. Pipe output of air vent to drain with an indirect connector or to exterior where it will not cause damage.

3.5 SPARE SPRINKLER CABINET
A. Attach to wall at the main sprinkler system riser.

B. Locate so cover is easy to open and readily accessible.

C. Locate in an area with a temperature between 40 and 100 degrees Fahrenheit.

D. Locate sprinkler wrenches inside cabinet.

E. Inside the cabinet, provide a list of sprinklers installed in the property, including sprinkler identification number, manufacturer, model, orifice, deflector type, thermal sensitivity and pressure rating, quantity of each type to be contained in the cabinet and issue or revision date of the list.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 453
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-1
SECTION 22 00 00

PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work included in 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements applies to Division 22, Plumbing work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of plumbing systems for proposed project.

C. Definitions:

1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation.

4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent", substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Section applies to Division 22, Plumbing Contract Documents.

B. Related Work:

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections and those listed in this Section.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 454
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-2
B. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from:

1. ABA - Architectural Barriers Act

2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act

3. AHRI - Air-Conditioning Heating & Refrigeration Institute

4. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

5. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers

6. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers

7. ASHRAE Guideline 0, the Commissioning Process

8. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers

9. ASPE - American Society of Plumbing Engineers

10. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering

11. ASTM - ASTM International

12. AWWA - American Water Works Association

13. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations

14. CGA - Compressed Gas Association

15. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

16. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories

17. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency

18. FM - FM Global

19. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials

20. GAMA - Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association

21. HI - Hydraulic Institute Standards

22. ISO - International Organization for Standardization

23. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society

24. NEC - National Electric Code

25. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association

26. NFGC - National Fuel Gas Code

27. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

28. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association

29. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation

30. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration

31. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc.

32. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association

33. TIMA - Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association

34. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

D. See Division 22, Plumbing individual Sections for additional references.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures as well as specific individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 455
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-3
B. Provide drawings in format and software release equal to the design documents. Drawings to be the same sheet size and scale as the Contract Documents.

C. In addition:

1. "No Exception Taken" constitutes that review is for general conformance with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given. Any action is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and quantity and will confirm and correlate at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of the work with that of all other trades, and the satisfactory performance of the work.

2. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format only. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one file per division containing one bookmarked PDF file with each bookmark corresponding to each Specification Section. Arrange bookmarks in ascending order of Specification Section number. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. All transmissions/submissions to be submitted to Architect. At Contractor’s option, two separate submittals may be provided, consisting of underground work and building work. Deviations will be returned without review.

3. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 22, Plumbing Sections.

4. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what differences, if any, exist between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the Specifications and Drawings. a. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents and schedules. Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed items.

Highlight connections by/to other trades.
b. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for products, fixtures, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided.

Reference Division 22, Plumbing Sections for specific items required in product data submittal outside of these requirements.
c. Provide pump curves, operation characteristics, capacities, ambient noise criteria, etc. for equipment.
d. For vibration isolation of equipment, list make and model selected with operating load and deflection. Indicate frame type where required. Submit manufacturer's product data.
e. See Division 22, Plumbing Sections for additional submittal requirements outside of these requirements.

5. Maximum of two reviews of complete submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; bear costs of additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to Contractor without review.

6. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet ASCE 7-16 requirements for non-structural components. Provide engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification.

Equipment Importance Factor as specified in Division 01 and in Structural documents.

7. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 22, Plumbing Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26, Electrical submittals.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 456
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-4

8. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment.

9. Substitutions and Variation from Basis of Design:
a. The Basis of Design designated product establishes the qualities and characteristics for the evaluation of any comparable products by other listed acceptable manufacturers if included in this Specification or included in an approved Substitution Request as judged by the Design Professional. b. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor is required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base Bid, including resulting charges for work performed under other Divisions, will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals." For any product marked "or approved equivalent," a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation.

10. Shop Drawings: Provide coordinated Shop Drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, equipment and piping layout plans, and control wiring diagrams. Reference individual Division 22, Plum bing Sections for additional requirements for Shop Drawings outside of these requirements. a. Provide Shop Drawings indicating sanitary and storm cleanout locations and type to Architect for approval prior to installation.
b. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation for approval prior to installation.

11. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual Sections.

12. Resubmission Requirements:
a. Make corrections or changes in submittals as required in response to Engineer’s comments. Provide a cover letter with resubmittal that includes responses to each of the Engineer’s submittal review comments and identifies changes in the resubmittal. Cloud changes in the submittals.
1) Resubmit for review until review indicates “no exception taken” or “make corrections noted.”
2) When submitting drawings for Engineer's re-review, clearly indicate changes on drawings and cloud any revisions. Submit a list describing each change.

13. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owner's Instructions:
a. Submit, at one time, electronic files (PDF format) of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring servicing. Include valve charts. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment.
1) Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project.
2) Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes, quantities, relevant to each piece of equipment: belts, motors, lubricants, and filters.
3) Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and sub assemblies.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 457
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-5
4) Include copy of startup and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. 5) Include copy of final water systems balancing log along with pump operating data.
6) Include commissioning reports.
7) Include copy of pressure, flow, leakage and purity test data and water systems test data, as applicable. Include copy of third-party and state and local jurisdiction inspection reports.
8) Include copy of valve charts/schedules.
9) Include Warranty per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections.
10) Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. 11) Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format. Contractor must arrange for additional reviews; Contractor to bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.
b. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual Sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements article titled "Demonstration." c. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, letter of conformance and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.

14. Record Drawings:
a. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording “As-constructed” conditions. Indicate on Drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements, location of cleanouts, and location of concealed mechanical items. Include items changed by field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions.
b. Record Drawings are to include equipment and fixture/connection schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for Project. c. At completion of project, input changes to original project on CAD Drawings and make one set of black-line drawings created from CAD Files in version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit CAD Files and drawings upon substantial completion.
d. Provide Invert elevations and dimensioned locations for water services, building waste, and storm drainage piping below grade extending to 5-feet outside building line.
e. See Division 22, Plumbing individual Sections for additional items to include in record drawings.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local, State and Federal codes, and other applicable laws and regulations. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 458
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-6
C. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis of Design manufacturers equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (i.e., piping) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis of Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work.

E. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

F. Provide products that are UL listed.

G. Piping Insulation products to contain less than 0.1 percent by weight PBDE in all insulating materials.

H. All potable water system components, devices, material, or equipment containing a weighted average of greater than 0.25 percent lead are prohibited, and shall be certified in accordance with current editions of the Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA), NSF 61 & NSF 372. Endpoint devices used to dispense water for drinking shall meet the requirements of NSF 61.

I. ASME Compliance: ASME listed water heaters and boilers with an input of 200,000 BTUH and higher, hot water storage tanks which exceed 120 gallons, and hot water expansion tanks which are connected to ASME rated equipment or required by code or local jurisdiction.

J. Provide safety controls required by National Boiler Code (ASME CSD 1) for boilers and water heaters with an input of 400,000 BTUH and higher.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00, Contracting and Procurement Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections.

B. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty in Division 01, General Requirements and the General Conditions.

Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

1.7 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to construction, prepare and submit coordinated layout drawings (composite drawings) to coordinate installation and location of ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, fire sprinklers, plumbing, lights, and electrical services. Composite Drawings show services on single sheet.

Key Drawings to structural column identification system. Prior to completion of Drawings, coordinate proposed installation with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including plumbing, HVAC, fire protection, electrical, ceiling suspension, and ceiling tile systems, etc.), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling, finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 459
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-7
B. Prepare Drawings as follows:

1. Drawings in Revit Model. Revit Model release equal to design documents. Drawings to be same sheet size and scale as Contract Drawings and indicate location, size and elevation above finished floor of equipment and distribution systems.

2. Review and revise, as necessary, section cuts in Contract Drawings after verification of field conditions.

3. Indicate plumbing system piping including fittings, hangers, access panels, valves, and bottom of pipe elevations above finished floor.

4. Indicate inverts and provision for piping that must be graded to have right-of-way over more flexible items. Drawings also to indicate proposed ceiling grid and lighting layout as shown on electrical drawings and architectural reflected ceiling drawings and HVAC equipment, ductwork and piping.

5. Incorporate Addenda items and change orders.

6. Distribute drawings to trades and provide additional coordination as requested by other trades.

C. Advise Architect in the event a conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise Architect of conflict.

D. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation related thereto.

E. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of project.

1.8 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install sleeves, inserts and anchorage required for the installation, which are embedded in work of other trades. Sleeve, wrap and seal piping in concrete.

B. Electrical: For plumbing trim/devices/equipment, provide, from the line voltage connection by Division 26, the low voltage electrical connections and wiring as required for complete and operable system. Includes, but is not limited to: Low voltage electrical raceway, wiring and accessories, such as step-down transformers as necessary for function of sensors and automatic valve and faucet controls. Supply step-down transformers and size wiring as recommended by manufacturer of plumbing trim/faucets requiring electrical low voltage connection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer, including but not limited to fixtures, pumps, drains and equipment.

2.2 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL or ETL listed and labeled or be approved by State, County, and City authorities prior to procurement and installation.

B. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 460
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-8
C. Hazardous Materials:

1. Comply with local, State of California, and Federal regulations relating to hazardous materials.

2. Comply with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements for this project relating to hazardous materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections.

B. Install equipment requiring access (i.e., drain pans, drains, control operators, valves, motors, cleanouts and water heaters) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage.

C. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Earthwork:

1. Confirm Earthwork requirements in Contract Documents. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections and the following:
a. Perform excavation, dewatering, shoring, bedding, and backfill required for installation of work in this Division in accordance with the provisions of related earthwork Sections/divisions. Contact utilities and locate existing utilities prior to excavation. Repair any work damaged during excavation or backfilling. b. Excavation: Do not excavate under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls. c. Provide protection of underground systems. Review the project Geotechnical Report for references to corrosive or deleterious soils which will reduce the performance or service life of underground systems materials.

E. Firestopping:

1. Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections and the following:
a. Coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping, ductwork and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

F. Pipe Installation:

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 461
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-9
of building. Install work to prevent damage to piping, equipment, and building and its contents. Provide piping offsets, loops, expansion joints, sleeves, anchors or other means to control pipe movement and minimize forces on piping. Verify anticipated settlement and/or shrinkage of building with Project Structural Engineer. Verify construction phasing, type of building construction products and rating for coordinating installation of piping systems.

2. Include provisions for servicing and removal of equipment without dismantling piping.

G. Plenums:

1. Provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums.

Immediately notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancy.

3.2 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, Structural documents, and individual Division 22 Plumbing Sections.

B. General:

1. Earthquake resistant designs for Plumbing (Division 22) equipment and distribution, i.e. motors, plumbing systems, piping, equipment, water heaters, boilers, etc. to conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority.

2. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction having authority.

3. Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic bracing and seismic movement assemblies for piping equipment and water heaters. Submit Shop Drawings along with equipment submittals.

4. Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic flexible joints for piping and crossing building expansion or seismic joints. Submit Shop Drawings along with seismic bracing details.

C. Piping:

1. Per CBC or local requirements.

D. Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of plumbing equipment during earthquake.

3.3 REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
A. Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections.

B. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that they may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation:

1. Underground piping installation prior to backfilling.

2. Prior to covering walls.

3. Prior to ceiling cover/installation.

4. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 462
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-10
D. Final Punch:

1. Prior to requesting a final punch visit from the Engineer, request from Engineer the Plumbing Precloseout Checklist, complete the checklist confirming completion of systems’ installation, and return to Engineer. Request a final punch visit from the Engineer, upon Engineer’s acceptance that the plumbing systems are ready for final punch.

2. Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Confirm Cutting and Patching requirements in Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections and the following:

1. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by Project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to Project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval. Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s).

2. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section will be performed by skilled craftspeople of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work.

3. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting.

Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout.

4. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Patch and repair specifically where existing items have been removed. This includes repairing and painting walls, ceilings, etc. where existing piping and devices are removed as part of this project. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and walks, surfaces to be repaired, refinished and left in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work.

5. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.5 EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY
A. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner.

3.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections and the following:

1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Insulation and lining that becomes wet from improper storage and handling to be replaced before installation. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be replaced before installation.

2. Protect equipment and pipe to avoid damage. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs.

Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.

3. Protect bright finished shafts, bearing housings and similar items until in service.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 463
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-11

3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections.

Provide field instruction to Owner's Maintenance Staff as specified in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified person at time approved by Owner, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations.

3.8 CLEANING
A. Confirm cleaning requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections.

B. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work.

3.9 INSTALLATION
A. Confirm installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections.

B. Install equipment and fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to vibration isolators. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

C. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.

Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

1. Do not place equipment in sustained operation prior to initial balancing of plumbing systems.

2. Provide pump impellers to obtain Basis of Design design capacities.

D. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment and piping.

3.10 PAINTING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 09, Finishes. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections and the following:

1. Ferrous Metal: After completion of plumbing work, thoroughly clean and paint exposed supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces, i.e., hangers, hanger rods, equipment October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 464
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-12
stands, with one coat of black asphalt for exterior or black enamel for interior, suitable for hot surfaces.

2. In a mechanical room, on roof or other exposed areas, machinery and equipment not painted with enamel to receive two coats of primer and one coat of rustproof enamel, colors as selected by Architect.

3. See individual equipment Specifications for other painting.

4. Structural Steel: Repair damage to structural steel finishes or finishes of other materials damaged by cutting, welding or patching to match original.

5. Piping: Clean, primer coat and paint exposed piping on roof or at other exterior locations with two coats paint suitable for metallic surfaces and exterior exposures. Color selected by Architect.

6. Covers: Covers such as manholes, cleanouts and the like will be furnished with finishes which resist corrosion and rust.

3.11 DEMOLITION
A. Confirm Demolition requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 02, Existing Conditions. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Sections in Division 22, Plumbing and the following:

1. Scope:
a. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and adjustments to plumbing system required to meet code, and accommodate installation of new work.
b. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access or access to different areas. c. Existing Conditions: Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings.

2. Equipment: Unless otherwise directed, equipment, fixtures, or fittings being removed as part of demolition process are Owner's property. Remove other items not scheduled to be reused or relocated from job site as directed by Owner.

3. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove exposed, unused piping to behind finished surfaces (floor, walls, ceilings, etc.). Cap piping and patch surfaces to match surrounding finish.

4. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove unused equipment, fixtures, fittings, rough-ins, and connectors. Removal is to be to a point behind finished surfaces (floors, walls, and ceilings).

3.12 ACCEPTANCE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Sections in Division 22, Plumbing and the following:

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 465
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-13
B. Reference State of California requirements for specific testing procedures and documentation requirements. Comply with State and local governmental standards and requirements for testing, and completion and submittal of appropriate forms as required by Title 24 and local governmental agencies related to this work.

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Confirm Field Quality Control requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and individual Division 22, Plumbing Sections.

B. Tests:

1. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with requirements specified. Reference individual Specification Sections for required tests. Document tests and include in operation and maintenance manuals.

2. During site evaluations by Architect or Engineer, provide appropriate personnel with tools to remove and replace trims, covers, and devices so that proper evaluation of installation can be performed.

3.14 LETTER OF CONFORMANCE
A. Provide Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties with a statement that plumbing items were installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, UL listings and FM Global approvals. Include Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

3.15 ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS
A. Where equipment motors are to be electrically interlocked with other equipment for simultaneous operation, utilize plumbing equipment wiring diagrams to coordinate with electrical systems so that proper wiring of equipment involved is affected.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 466
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23-1
SECTION 22 05 23

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Valves, General

2. Gate Valves

3. Ball Valves

4. Swing Check Valves

5. Lift Check Valves

6. Thermostatic Point-of-Use Mixing Valves (ASSE 1070 Rated)

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 22, Plumbing and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. California Standard AB 1953 and/or NSF/ANSI 372 for potable water services. Valves must be 3rd-party certified.

2. ISO 9001 Certified.

3. IAPMO Certified for Low Lead.

C. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from a single source and from a single manufacturer.

D. Model numbers indicated as Basis-of-Design indicate valve characteristics. All valves are to meet code Low Lead/Lead Free Standards.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 467
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from a single source and from a single manufacturer.

B. Valves, General:

1. Apollo

2. Armstrong

3. ASCO

4. Caleffi

5. Cla-Val

6. Conbraco

7. Crane

8. Clow

9. Griswold

10. Hammond

11. Hays

12. Jenkins

13. Josam

14. Kennedy

15. Milwaukee

16. Mueller

17. Nibco

18. Red-White Valve

19. Smith

20. Stockham

21. Tour Anderson

22. Wade

23. Watts

24. Wilkins

25. Zurn

26. Or approved equivalent.

C. Gate Valves:

1. See Valves, General above.

D. Ball Valves:

1. See Valves, General above.

2. NSF Valves:
a. Clow
b. Kennedy
c. Nibco
d. Or approved equivalent.

E. Swing Check Valves:

1. See Valves, General above.

F. Lift Check Valves:

1. See Valves General above.

G. Thermostatic Point-of-Use Mixing Valves (ASSE 1070 Rated):

1. Caleffi

2. Lawler
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 468
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23-3

3. Leonard

4. Powers Hydroguard

5. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 VALVES - GENERAL
A. General:

1. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.

2. Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarterturn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves 6-inches and smaller. Provide gear operators for quarter-turn valves 8-inches and larger and plug valves installed over 5-feet above finished floor.

3. Valve Identification: Manufacturer's name (or trademark) and pressure rating clearly marked on valve body.

B. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extension and following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation on valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation and memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

C. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

3. Threaded: With thread according to ASME B1.20.1.

D. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

E. Building Service:

1. Shutoff and Isolation Valves:
a. Pipe Sizes 3-inches and Smaller: Ball Valve.

2. Drain Service: Ball Valves.

3. Strainer Blow-Off: Ball Valve.

4. Check Valves: Swing.

2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves - Class 150:

1. 2-inches and Smaller: Class 150, MSS SP-80, ASTM B62 cast bronze body, bronze bonnet, bronze wedge, non-rising stem, brass packing gland, non-asbestos packing and aluminum or malleable iron hand-wheel.

2. 2 1/2-inches and Larger: Class 150, MSS SP-70, ASTM A126 Grade B, IBBM, ductile iron body, bonnet and wedge, bronze trim, non-rising stem, brass packing gland, nonasbestos packing and cast iron hand-wheel.

2.4 BALL VALVES
A. All ball valves on brazed piping are to be three-piece.

B. 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, 400-600 PSI, two-piece full port ball configuration, bronze body, extended soldered ends for copper pipe and threaded ends for iron pipe, lead-free brass or stainless steel ball, lead-free brass stem, Teflon seat, extended steel handle. Apollo 77CLF 100 Series two-piece.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 469
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23-4

2.5 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. 2-inches and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, horizontal swing, regrinding type, Y-pattern, renewable disc. Nibco 413. MSS SP-80.

B. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Class 125, iron body, bolted bonnet, horizontal swing, renewable seat and disc, flanged ends. Nibco F918. MMS SP-71.

C. Rubber Flapper Check Valve: Horizontal or vertical upward flow installation. Working pressure to 175 PSI. Ductile iron or cast iron body. Steel reinforced Buna-N rubber flapper epoxy coating on wetted parts. MSS SP-80.

2.6 LIFT CHECK VALVES
A. 3-inches and Smaller: Bronze body, 125 PSI, spring loaded, Teflon seat. Steam Service, Teflon Disc: Apollo CYB-LF (Lead Free). Water, Gas or Oil Service, Buna-N Disc: MSS SP-80.

2.7 THERMOSTATIC POINT-OF-USE MIXING VALVES (ASSE 1070 RATED) A. Thermostatic type with bronze body construction, corrosion resistant materials, union end stops, check inlets with strainers, 0-200 degree F dial thermometer and discharge shut-off valve.

Mixing valves to meet ASSE 1070.

B. Maximum required delta temperature differential between hot water supply temperature and delivery temperature is 15 degrees F. Set valve outlet temperature per drawing requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.

3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

4. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Inspect the shipping container before unpacking to look for damage that could have occurred during transport, and report it to the transportation company immediately. After visual inspection, remove the valve from the shipping container. Make sure the faces are free of any scratches and that there is not any obvious damage to the actuator assembly or valve body.

D. Make sure to note the valve's model number during the unpacking process. The model number will need to be provided when purchasing replacement parts.

E. Purge and clean all piping to be connected to valve.

F. Install per manufacturer's recommendations.

G. Determine that the valve and its plumbing piping is adequately supported when installed. If a valve is not adequately supported, this could prevent the valve from operating and sealing October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 470
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23-5
correctly. Be sure that all mating flanges are in line and parallel to minimize straining on joints and valve body.

H. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

I. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

J. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.

K. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with hose end adapter and cap on chain for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane. Ensure installation provides full stem movement.

L. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended stem valves, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation.

M. Mechanical Actuators: Install with chain operators where indicated. Extend chains to 5-feet above floor and hook to clips to clear aisle passage.

N. Stem Selection: Outside screw and yoke stems, except provide inside screw, non-rising stem where space prevents full opening of OS&Y valves.

O. Seats: Renewable seats, except where otherwise indicated.

P. When soldering, use paste flux that are approved by the manufacturer for use with lead free alloys.

Q. If valve applications are not indicated on Drawings, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves.

R. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

S. Valves, except wafer/butterfly types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, 2-inches and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end.

2. For Steel Piping, 2-inches and Smaller: Threaded ends.

3. For Steel Piping, 2-1/2-inches to NPS 4-inches: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end.

T. Valve Adjusting and Cleaning:

1. Inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace valve if leak persists.

2. Valve Identification. Tag valves per Section 22 05 53, Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

3.2 GATE VALVES INSTALLATION
A. See General Installation Requirements above.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 471
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23-6

3.3 BALL VALVES INSTALLATION
A. See General Installation Requirements above.

3.4 SWING CHECK VALVES INSTALLATION
A. See General Installation Requirements above.

B. Swing Check Valve Installation: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin horizontally perpendicular to centerline of pipe. Install for proper direction of flow. Only install where there are 10 pipe diameters of straight pipe upstream of valve.

C. Ejector and Sump Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

1. 2-inches and Smaller: Bronze swing or spring-loaded lift check valves with bronze disc.

2. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Rubber flapper swing check valves with lever and weight.

D. Domestic Water and Circulation Pump Discharge Check Valves:

1. 2-inches and Smaller: Bronze body, spring loaded, lead free, lift check.

2. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Wafer style, silent lift check valve, lead free.

3.5 LIFT CHECK VALVES INSTALLATION
A. See General Installation Requirements above.

B. Lift Check Valve Installation: Install in piping line with stem vertically upward, position for proper direction of flow.

C. Ejector and Sump Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

1. 2-inches and Smaller: Bronze swing or spring-loaded lift check valves with bronze disc.

2. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Rubber flapper swing check valves with lever and weight.

D. Domestic Water and Circulation Pump Discharge Check Valves:

1. 2-inches and Smaller: Bronze body, spring loaded, lead free, lift check.

2. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Wafer style, silent lift check valve, lead free.

3.6 THERMOSTATIC POINT-OF-USE MIXING VALVES (ASSE 1070 RATED) INSTALLATION A. See General Installation Requirements above.

B. Install mixing valve per manufacturer's instruction manual.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 472
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-1
SECTION 22 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Pipe Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

2. Wall and Floor Sleeves

3. Building Attachments

4. Flashing

5. Miscellaneous Metal and Materials

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 22, Plumbing and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. ASCE 7-16, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

2. Hanger spacing installation and attachment to meet all manufacturer's requirements and MSS SP-58.

3. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90 "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports".

4. Install piping per SMACNA's requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General - Provide pipe and equipment hangers and supports in accordance with the following:

1. When supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints for equipment, and supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints for piping are not shown on the Drawings, the contractor is responsible for their design.

2. Connections to structural framing are not to introduce twisting, torsion, or lateral bending in the framing members. Provide supplementary steel as required.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 473
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-2
B. Engineered Support Systems:

1. Support frames such as pipe racks or stanchions for piping and equipment which provide support from below.

2. Equipment and piping support frame anchorage to supporting slab or structure.

C. Provide channel support systems, for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting the combined weight of supported systems, system contents and test water.

D. Provide heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting the combined weight of supported systems, system contents and test water.

E. Provide seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

F. Obtain approval from AHJ for seismic restraint hanger and support system to be installed for piping and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Pipe Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment:

1. Pipe Hangers/Supports:
a. B-Line Systems Inc.
b. Anvil International
c. HOLDRITE
d. Erico Co. Inc.
e. Snappitz Thermal Pipe Shield Manufacturing
f. Rilco Manufacturing Co. Inc.
g. Nelsen-Olson Inc.
h. Or approved equivalent.

2. Channel Support Systems:
a. B-Line Systems Inc.
b. Anvil International, Anvit-Strut
c. Erico Hanger Co. Inc.; O-Strut Div.
d. Unistrut Corp.
e. HOLDRITE EZ-Strut Systems
f. Or approved equivalent.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:
a. Erico Hanger Co. Inc.
b. Pipe Shields, Inc.
c. Rilco Manufacturing Co. Inc.
d. HOLDRITE Insulation Couplings
e. Or approved equivalent.

4. Freestanding Roof Supports:
a. Miro
b. Nelson-Olsen Inc. / Quick "Pipe" Block
c. Eaton / B-Line / Dura-Blok
d. Mifab
e. Or approved equivalent.

5. Pipe Alignment and Secondary Supports:
a. HOLDRITE
b. Starquick
c. Or approved equivalent.

B. Wall and Floor Sleeves:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 474
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-3

1. Pre-Engineered Firestop Pipe Penetration Systems:
a. HOLDRITE HydroFlame
b. Proset
c. Or approved equivalent.

C. Building Attachments:

1. Anchor-It

2. Gunnebo Fastening Corp.

3. ITW Ramset / Red Head

4. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.

5. Or approved equivalent.

D. Flashing:

1. Fastenal

2. Or approved equivalent.

E. Miscellaneous Metal and Materials:

1. See Miscellaneous Metal and Materials article below.

2. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:
a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp.
b. Hilti, Inc.
c. ITW Ramset / Red Head
d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
e. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports - Horizontal and Vertical Piping, and Hanger Rod Attachments:

1. Factory fabricated horizontal piping hangers and supports to suit piping systems in accordance manufacturer's published product information.

2. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service.

3. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping.

4. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for uninsulated copper piping systems.

5. Provide padded pipe hangers, clamps and supports for thermoplastic piping system.

6. Install no hub cast iron pipe and fittings per CISPI 301-09 Installation Procedures for Hubless Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain Waste and Vent Piping Applications. Brace hubless cast iron pipe and fittings 5-inch and larger with HOLDRITE No Hub Pipe Restraints or approved equivalent.

B. Pipe Hangers, Guides and Channel Systems:

1. Hanger Rods: Hanger rods continuously threaded or threaded ends only in concealed spaces and threaded ends only in exposed spaces; finish electro-galvanized or cadmiumplated in concealed spaces and prime painted in exposed spaces; sizes per MSS.

2. Hanger Rod Couplings: Malleable iron rod coupling with elongated center sight gap for visual inspection; to have same finish as hanger rods.

3. Pipe Rings for Hanger Rods: Pipe sizes 2-inch and smaller, MSS SP Type 6 or Type 10, or approved equivalent. Pipe sizes 2-1/2-inches and larger, clevis type hangers with adjustable nuts on rod. MSS SP Type 1. Pipe rings to have same finish as hanger rods.

4. Pipe Slides: Type 35 reinforced Teflon slide material (3/32-inch minimum thickness) bonded to steel; highly finished steel or stainless steel contact surfaces to resists corrosion; 60-80 PSI maximum active contact surface loading; steel parts 3/16-inch minimum thickness; attachment to pipe and framing by welding.

5. Pipe Guides:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 475
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-4
a. Furnish and install pipe guides on continuous runs where pipe alignment must be maintained. Minimum two on each side of expansion joints, spaced per manufacturer's recommendations for pipe size. Fasten guides securely to pipe and structure. Any contact with chilled water pipe is not to permit heat to be transferred in sufficient quantity to cause condensation on any surface. b. Furnish and install guides approximately 4 pipe diameters (first guide) and 14 diameters (second guide) away from each end of expansion joints. Guides are not to be used as supports and are in addition to other pipe hangers and supports.

6. Channel Type Pipe Hanging System: Framing members No. 12 gauge formed steel channels, 1-5/8-inch square, conforming to ASTM A1011 GR33; one side of channel to have a continuous slot with in-turned lips; framing nut with grooves and spring 1/2-inch size, conforming to ASTM 675 GR60; screws conforming to ASTM A307; fittings conforming to ASTM A575; parts enamel painted or electro-galvanized.

C. Pipe Saddles and Shields:

1. Factory fabricated saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports for insulated piping.

2. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. 1/2 round, 18 gauge, minimum 12-inches in length (4-inch pipe and larger to be three times longer than pipe diameter).

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-PSI (690-kPa) minimum compressive strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.

1. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.

2. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium silicate.

3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.

4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield to cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

5. Insert Length: Extend 2-inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

6. Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts should be provided at the hanger points and guide locations on pipes requiring insulation. The Inserts should consist of Polyisocyanurate (urethane or phenolic insulation) encircling the entire circumference of the pipe with a 360 degree PVC (1.524 mm thick) with a living hinge and J lock and installed during the installation of the piping system.

E. Roller Hangers:

1. Adjustable roller hanger. Black steel yoke, cast iron roller. MSS Type 41.

F. Beam Clamps:

1. MSS Type 19 and 23, wide throat, with retaining clip.

2. Universal Side Beam Clamp: MSS Type 20.

G. Hangers for Pipe Size 2-inches and Smaller:

1. Adjustable swivel ring hanger, UL listed, Type 6 or Type 10.

H. Hangers for Pipe Size 2-1/2-inches and Larger:

1. Adjustable clevis type, UL listed, Type 1.

I. Riser Clamps:

1. Steel, UL listed. MSS Type 8.

J. Plumbers Tape:

1. Not permitted as pipe hangers or pipe straps.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 476
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-5
K. Pipe Alignment and Secondary Support Systems:

1. Secondary Pipe supports for general applications (Non-Acoustical). a. Supports will be manufactured in compliance with IAPMO Product Standard PS 42-96. All products provided will be listed by IAPMO for secondary pipe support. b. Supports may be used when sound and/or vibration transfer is not a concern.

2. Secondary pipe supports for sound and vibration attenuation (Acoustical). a. Supports will be manufactured in compliance with IAPMO Product Standard PS 42-96. All products provided will be listed by IAPMO for secondary pipe support. b. Acoustical pipe supports will be manufactured and installed in compliance with International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 3822-1 with current amendments.
c. Supports will be used when sound and/or vibration transfer is a concern. Locations where acoustical supports will be provided and include but are not limited to partition walls between living units, tenant spaces, retail units, mechanical rooms and lobbies.
d. Support Products:
1) Support to Wall Brace and Wall Stud Penetrations: HOLDRITE #261, #262, #263, and #264, or approved equivalent.
2) Pipe Wrap for Pipe Clamps and Channel-Mounted Pipe Clamps: HOLDRITE #270, or approved equivalent.
3) Pipe Wrap for Pipe Hangers: HOLDRITE #271, #272-2, and #272-4, or approved equivalent.
4) Drop-Ear Fitting Support: HOLDRITE #265, or approved equivalent. 5) Floor Riser Isolation Pads: HOLDRITE #275-T, or approved equivalent. 6) Floor Isolation Pads (General Applications): HOLDRITE #274, #275, #276, and #278, or approved equivalent.

2.3 WALL AND FLOOR SLEEVES
A. Below Grade and High Water Table Areas:

1. Modular Link Sealing System at Pipe Sleeves: Neoprene gasket links bolted together around an interior sleeve forming a watertight seal. Use a modular link sealing system at sleeves to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and the wall opening.

Provide Link-seal Type C unless otherwise noted. OS with S-316 stainless construction for continuous water/tank walls.

2. Sleeves through concrete foundation walls and floors. Ductile iron pipe. Class 50 or 51 pipe conforming to ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51. Pipe sleeve will extend a minimum of 6- inches beyond outside perimeter of foundation. Final placement of sleeve will be confirmed with project's structural engineer. In areas with a high water table, provide AWWA C900, Class 235 plastic pipe in lieu of ductile iron pipe.

B. Pre-Engineered Firestop Pipe Penetration Systems: UL listed assemblies for maintaining fire rating of piping penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with ASTM E814.

C. Insulating Caulking: Eagle or Pitcher Super 66 high temperature cement.

D. Fabricated Accessories:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: Fabricate from Schedule 40 black or galvanized steel pipe. Remove end burrs by grinding.

2. Sheet Metal Pipe Sleeves: Fabricate from G-90 galvanized sheets closed with lock-seam joints. Provide following minimum gauges for sizes indicated:
a. Sleeve Size 4-inches in Diameter and Smaller: 18 gauge. b. Sleeve Sizes 5-inches to 6-inches: 16 gauge.
c. Sleeve Sizes 7-inches and Larger: 14 gauge.
d. Fire-Rated Safing Material:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 477
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-6
1) Rockwool Insulation: Complying with FS-HH-I-558, Form A, Class IV, 6 lbs./cu.ft. density with melting point of 1985 degrees F and K value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2) Calcium Silicate Insulation: Noncombustible, complying with FS-HH-I-523, Type II, suitable for 100 degrees F to 1200 degrees F service with K value of 0.40 at 150 degrees F.

2.4 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A. General: Anchor supports to existing masonry, block and tile walls per anchoring system manufacturer's recommendations or as modified by project Structural Engineer. Provide anchor bolts suitable for cracked concrete.

B. Anchor Bolts:

1. Anchor Bolts (Cast-In-Place): Steel bolts, ASTM A307. Nuts to conform to ASTM A194.

Design values for shear and tension not more than 80 percent of the allowable listed loads.

2. Anchor (Expansion) Bolts: Carbon steel to ASTM A307; nut to conform to ASTM A194; drilled-in type. Design values for shear and tension not more than 80 percent of the allowable listed loads.

3. Anchor (Adhesive) Bolts: Consisting of two-part adhesive cartridge and zinc-plated Type A307 steel anchor bolt rod assembly with ASTM A194 nut.

C. Beam Clamps:

1. MSS Type 19 and 23, wide throat, with retaining clip.

2. Universal Side Beam Clamp: MSS Type 20.

D. Powder-Actuated Drive Pin Fasteners:

1. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder actuated type, drive pin attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

E. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

F. Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B, factory mixed and packaged, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications.

2. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and non-gaseous.

3. Design Mix: 5000-PSI (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

2.5 FLASHING
A. Steel Flashing: 26 gauge galvanized steel.

B. Safes: 8 mil thick neoprene.

C. Caps: Steel, 22 gauge minimum, 16 gauge at fire-resistant structures.

D. Provide hot dipped galvanized components for items exposed to weather.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 478
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-7

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS METAL AND MATERIALS
A. Miscellaneous Metal: Provide miscellaneous metal items specified hereunder, including materials, fabrication, fastenings and accessories required for finished installation, where indicated on Drawings or otherwise not shown on drawings, that are necessary for completion of the project. The Contractor is responsible for their design.

1. Fabricate miscellaneous units to size, shapes and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.

B. Structural Shapes: Where miscellaneous metal items are needed to be fabricated from structural steel shapes and plates, provide members constructed of steel conforming with requirements of ASTM A36 or approved equivalent.

C. Steel Pipe: Provide seamless steel pipe conforming to requirements of ASTM A53, Type S, Grade A, or Grade B. Weight and size required as specified.

D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of types as required for assembly and installation of fabricated items; surface-applied fasteners are specified elsewhere.

E. Bolts: Low carbon steel externally and internally threaded fasteners conforming with requirements of ASTM A307; include necessary nuts and plain hardened washers. For structural steel elements supporting mechanical material or equipment from building structural members or connection thereto, use fasteners conforming to ASTM A325.

F. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide incidental accessory materials, tools, methods and equipment required for fabrication.

G. Provide hot dipped galvanized components for items exposed to weather.

H. Use straps, threshold rods and wire with sizes required by SMACNA to support piping.

I. Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B, factory mixed and packaged, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications.

2. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and non-gaseous.

3. Design Mix: 5000-PSI (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Examination:

1. Verify building materials to have hangers and attachments affixed in accordance with hangers to be used. Provide supporting calculations.

B. Preparation:

1. Examine Drawings and coordinate for verification of exact locations of fire and smoke rated walls, partitions, floors and other assemblies. Indicate, by shading and labeling on Record Drawings such locations and label as "1-Hour Wall," "2-Hour Fire/Smoke Barrier," and the like. Determine proper locations for piping penetrations. Set sleeves in place in new floors, walls or roofs prior to concrete pour or grouting.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 479
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-8
C. Install hangers, supports, anchors and sleeves after required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Coordinate with project structural engineer proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments.

3.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Hangers and Supports:

1. Comply with MSS SP-58. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

For horizontally hung grooved-end piping, provide a minimum of 2 hangers per pipe section.

2. Pipe Ring Diameters:
a. Uninsulated and Insulated Pipe, except where oversized pipe rings are specified:

Ring inner diameter to suit pipe outer diameter.
b. Insulated Piping Where Oversized Pipe Rings are Specified and Vibration Isolating Sleeves: Ring inner diameter to suit outer diameter of insulation or sleeve.

3. Oversize Pipe Rings: Provide oversize pipe rings of 2-inch and larger size.

4. Pipe Support Brackets: Support pipe with pipe slides.

5. Steel Backing in Walls: Provide steel backing in walls to support fixtures and piping hung from steel stud walls.

6. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems.
a. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Pipe Guides:
a. Install on continuous runs where pipe alignment must be maintained. Provide a minimum of two on each side of expansion joints, spaced per manufacturer's recommendations for pipe size. Fasten guides to pipe structure. Any contact with chilled water pipe should not permit heat to be transferred in sufficient quantity to cause condensation on any surface.
b. Install approximately 4 pipe diameters (first guide) and 14 diameters (second guide) away from each end of expansion joints. Do not use as supports. Provide in addition to other required pipe hangers and supports.

8. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field -fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes. a. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.
b. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1

9. Group parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze-type hangers.

10. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe.

11. Do not support piping from other piping.

12. Fire protection piping will be supported independently of other piping.

13. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated.

14. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories.

15. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchor, and to facilitate the action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.

16. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 480
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-9

17. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping" is not exceeded.

18. Insulated Piping: (comply with the following)
a. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
1) Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
2) Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
3) Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9. b. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without a vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 1) Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
c. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping having a vapor barrier. Shields to span arc of 180 degrees.
1) Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
d. Shield Dimensions for Pipe, not less than the following:
1) NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN 90): 12-inches long and 0.048-inch thick. 2) NPS 4 (DN100): 12-inches long and 0.06-inch thick.
3) NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN125 and DN150): 18-inches long and 0.06-inch thick. 4) NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN200 to DN350): 24-inches long and 0.075-inch thick. 5) NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN400 to DN600): 24-inches long and 0.105-inch thick. e. Pipes NPS 8 (DN200) and Larger: Include wood inserts. f. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. g. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

19. Equipment Clearances: Do not route equipment or piping through electrical rooms, transformer vaults, elevator equipment rooms, IT rooms, MPOE rooms, or other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures and the like. Within equipment rooms, provide minimum 3-feet lateral clearance from all sides of electric switchgear panels. Do not route piping or equipment above any electric power or lighting panel, switchgear, or similar electric device. Coordinate with Electrical and coordinate exact equipment or pipe routing to provide proper clearance with such items.

20. Pipe supports and hanger spacing (pipe supported from structure or floor-supported) to meet the requirements of References and Standards Article in Part 1 above.

B. Pipe Curb Assemblies:

1. Provide for piping and electrical conduit which penetrates the structural roof deck to service equipment above the roof level (e.g., piping, electrical power and control wiring).

Meet requirements of roof warranty.

2. Provide prefabricated units for roof membrane and insulation penetrations related to equipment. Coordinate with roofing system. Set supports on the structural deck. Do not set supports on insulation or roofing. Provide level supports by prefabricated pitch built into the curb.

3. Piping above roof to be supported with freestanding roof pipe supports unless detailed otherwise. At roofing applications, the adhesion mastic is to be specifically submitted to and approved by the roofing system manufacturer/installer to maintain the integrity of all warranties.

4. At concrete floors, install a polyurethane mastic to the support block and adhere in place.

C. Vertical Piping:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 481
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-10

1. Support with U-clamps fastened to wall to hold piping away from wall unless otherwise approved.

2. Riser clamps to be directly under fitting or welded to pipe. Provide neoprene pads for all systems except natural gas.

3. Riser to be supported at each floor penetration.

4. Provide structural steel supports at the base of pipe risers. Size supports to carry forces exerted by piping system when in operation.

D. Adjusting and Painting:

1. Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. Provide grout under supports to bring piping and equipment to proper level and elevations.

2. Prime paint ferrous nongalvanized hangers, accessories, and supplementary steel which are not factory painted.

3.3 WALL AND FLOOR SLEEVES
A. Modular Link Sealing System Pipe Sleeves: Install at slab on grade floor/below grade piping penetrations. Provide manufacturer's sleeve appropriate to seal type for pre-cast penetrations (except for DWV piping at slab on grade). Provide manufacturer's sleeve appropriate to seal type for pre-cast penetrations.

B. Fabricated Pipe Sleeves:

1. Provide either steel or sheet metal pipe sleeves accurately centered around pipe routes.

Size such that piping and insulation, if any, will have free movement within the sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion. Sleeve diameter to be determined by local seismic clearance requirement, and by waterproofing requirements.

2. Length: Equal to thickness of construction penetrated, except extend floor sleeves 1-inch above floor finish.

3. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement in concrete and other work around sleeves. Provide temporary end closures to prevent concrete and other materials from entering pipe sleeves.

4. Seal each end airtight with a resilient nonhardening sealer, UL listed and fire rated per ASTM 814.

3.4 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A. Install within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel or wood. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints and at changes in direction of piping.

B. Attachment to Wood Structure: Provide MSS Type 34 for attachment to wooden beam or approved attachment for a wood structure.

C. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.

Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert secure to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 PSI is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top in inserts.

E. Install powder-actuated drive pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Test powder-actuated insert attachments with a minimum load of 100 pounds.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 482
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-11
F. Bolting: Provide bored, drilled or reamed holes for bolting to miscellaneous structural metals, frames or for mounts or supports. Flame cut, punched or hand sawn holes will not be accepted.

G. Anchor Bolts:

1. Install anchor bolts for mechanical equipment and piping as required. Tightly fit and clamp base-supported equipment anchor bolts at equipment support points. Provide locknuts where equipment and piping are hung.

2. Anchor Bolts (Cast-In-Place): Embed anchor bolts in new cast-in-place concrete to anchor equipment. Install a pipe sleeve around the anchor bolt for adjustment of the top 1/3 of the bolt embedment; sizes and patterns to suit the installation conditions of the equipment to be anchored.

H. Pipe Anchors: Provide anchors to fasten piping which is subject to expansion and contraction, and adjacent to equipment to prevent loading high forces onto the equipment.

I. Escutcheon Plates: Install around horizontal and vertical piping at visible penetrations through walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings, including penetrations through closets, through below ceiling corridor wall, and through equipment room walls and floors.

J. Installation of metallic or plastic piping penetrations through non fire-rated walls and partitions and through smoke-rated walls and partitions:

1. Install fabricated pipe sleeve.

2. After installation of sleeve and piping, tightly pack entire annular void between piping or piping insulation and sleeve identification with specified material.

3. Seal each end airtight with a resilient nonhardening UL listed fire resistant ASTM 814 sealant.

K. Piping Penetrations Through Fire-Rated (1 to 3 hour) Assemblies:

1. Select and install pre-engineered pipe penetration system in accordance with the UL listing and manufacturer's recommendation.

2. Provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to accommodate the penetration. Firestop voids between sleeve or core-drilled hole and pipe passing through to meet the requirements of ASTM E814. Use HOLDRITE HydroFlame or approved equivalent.

L. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories.

3.5 FLASHING
A. Flash and counter flash where piping passes through weather or waterproofed walls, floors and roofs.

B. Flash vent soil pipes with flashings per Division 01, General Requirements.

C. Flash floor drains over finished areas and roof drains, 10-inches clear on sides, minimum 36- inches by 36-inches sheet size. See Division 01, General Requirements. Fasten flashing to drain with clamping device.

D. Install built up fixtures (mop sinks, shower stalls, shower floors) with water sealing systems/membranes to meet Code and as prescribed by Division 01, General Requirements and Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements. Meet all Code testing requirements.

Provide drainage devices with appropriate flanges, clamps, etc. to meet these installation requirements and ensure a water-tight installation.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 483
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-12

3.6 MISCELLANEOUS METAL AND MATERIALS
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.

B. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; including, threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. Avoid cutting concrete reinforcing when drilling for inserts.

Reference structural drawings and reinforcing shop drawings and determine locations of stirrups prior to drilling into concrete.

C. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction.

D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work.

E. Setting Loose Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.

1. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-off flush with edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. Use metallic non-shrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use non-metallic non-shrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

F. Fabrication:

1. General: Verify dimensions prior to fabrication. Form metal items to accurate sizes and configurations as indicated on Drawings and otherwise required for proper installation; make with lines straight and angles sharp, clean and true; drill, countersink, tap, and otherwise prepare items for connections with work of other trades, as required. Fabricate to detail of structural shapes, plates and bars; weld joints where practicable; provide bolts and other connection devices required. Include anchorages; clip angles, sleeves, anchor plates and similar devices. Hot dip galvanize after fabrication items installed in exterior locations. Set accurately in position as required and anchor securely to building construction. Construct items with joints formed for strength and rigidity, accurately machining for proper fit; where exposed to weather, form to exclude water.

2. Finishes:
a. Ferrous Metal: After fabrication, but before erection, clean surfaces by mechanical or chemical methods to remove rust, scale, oil, corrosion, or other substances detrimental to bonding of subsequently applied protective coatings. For metal items exposed to weather or moisture, galvanize in manner to obtain G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A123. Provide other non-galvanized ferrous metal with 1 coat of approved rust-resisting paint primer, in manner to obtain not less than 1.0 mil dry film thickness. Touch-up damaged areas with primer of same material before installation. Apply zinc coatings and paint primers uniformly and smoothly; leave ready for finish painting as specified elsewhere. b. Metal in contact with Concrete, Masonry and Other Dissimilar Materials:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 484
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-13
1) Where metal items are to be erected in contact with dissimilar materials, provide contact surfaces with coating of an approved zinc-chromate primer in manner to obtain not less than 1.0 mil dry film thickness, in addition to other coatings specified in these specifications.
c. For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.

G. Metal Fabrication:

1. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports.

2. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

3. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of weld and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
c. Remove welding flux immediately.
d. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

4. Provide hot dipped galvanized components for items exposed to weather.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 485
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT 22 05 53-1
SECTION 22 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Plastic Nameplates

2. Tags

3. Plastic Pipe Markers

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 22, Plumbing and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, submit Valve Schedule for each piping system, in tabular format using Microsoft Word or Excel software. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses by special "flags" in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for maintenance manuals.

Provide schedules organized as follows:

1. Equipment Type:
a. Identification:
b. Background:
1) Size:
2) Color:
c. Lettering:
1) Size:
2) Color:

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification devices of types and sizes required.

2. Codes and Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices unless otherwise indicated.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 486
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT 22 05 53-2

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 22, Plumbing Sections. Where more than a single type is specified for application, provide single selection for each product category.

B. Plastic Nameplates:

1. Brady Corporation

2. Or approved equivalent.

C. Tags:

1. Brady Corporation

2. Brimar

3. Champion America Inc.

4. Craftmark

5. Seton Identification Products

6. Or approved equivalent.

D. Plastic Pipe Markers:

1. Brady Corporation

2. Brimar

3. Champion America Inc.

4. Craftmark

5. Seton Identification Products

6. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 PLASTIC NAMEPLATES
A. Description: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate 1/8-inch thick, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated.

1. Letter Color: White.

2. Letter Height: 1/2 inch.

3. Background Color: Black.

4. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

5. Access Panel Markers: Manufacturer's standard 1/16-inch thick engraved plastic laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed valve or devices/equipment. Include center hole to allow attachment.

6. Signage for hot water outlets on 140 degree F hot water systems not protected by ASSE 1070 mixing valves; hose bibbs, janitor sinks, and fixtures used by trained personnel. a. Manufacturer's standard 1/8-inch thick engraved plastic laminate signage 4 by 4- inches.
b. Letter Color: Red.
c. Letter Height: 1/2 inch.
d. Background Color: White.
e. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 487
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT 22 05 53-3

2.3 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2-inch diameter.

B. Metal Tags: Polished Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2-inch diameter with smooth edges.

C. Valve designations to be coordinated with existing valve identifications to ensure no repetitive designations are utilized.

D. Chart/Schedules: Valve Schedule Frames. For each page of a valve schedule, provide glazed display frame with removable mounting as appropriate for wall construction upon which frame is to be mounted. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass.

E. Valve Tag Fasteners: Solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks.

F. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4- by 7-inches.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE.

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

2.4 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS
A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1 and ANSI Z535.1.

B. Plastic Pipe Markers (for external diameters of 6-inches and larger including insulation): Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.

C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers (for external diameters less than 6-inches including insulation):

Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

Minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Lettering and Graphics:

1. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in plumbing identification work with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled.

Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.

2. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples: Chiller No. 3, Air Handling Unit No. 42, Standpipe F12, and the like).

B. Preparation: Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 488
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT 22 05 53-4
C. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

D. Install valve schedule at each mechanical room.

E. Access Doors: Provide markers on each access door and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance and operating instructions.

3.2 PLASTIC NAMEPLATES
A. Identify pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates riveted to equipment body.

B. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates riveted to equipment body.

C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners.

3.3 TAGS
A. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags. Use metal tags on piping 3/4- inch diameter and smaller.

B. Identify valves in main and branch piping with metal tags. Indicate valve function and the normally open or closed positions on the valve tag.

C. Coordinate with the facility maintenance personnel to ensure consistency with the existing tagging system.

D. Tag balancing valves with balanced GPM or CFM indicated after balancing is completed and accepted.

E. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

3.4 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS
A. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. For exterior underground piping installations, install underground plastic pipe markers with tracer wire 6- to 8-inches below finished grade directly above buried pipe.

D. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20-feet (reduced to 10-feet in congested areas and mechanical equipment rooms) on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. Locate near branches, valves, control devices, equipment connections, access doors, floor/wall penetrations.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 489
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00-1
SECTION 22 07 00

PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Type 1, Glass Wool Pipe Insulation

2. Type 7, ADA Accessible Lavatory/Sink Insulation Kit

3. Accessories

4. Pipe Fitting Insulation Covers

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 22, Plumbing and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Piping insulation products to contain less than 0.1 percent by weight PBDE in all insulating materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Installer qualifications.

2. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any) for each type of product indicated.

3. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated.

Include dates of tests.

4. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.

5. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Formaldehyde Free: Should be third-party certified with UL Environment Validation.

2. Recycled Content: A minimum of 40 percent post-consumer recycled glass content certified and UL validated.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 490
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00-2

3. Low Emitting Materials: For all thermal and acoustical applications of Glass Mineral Wool Insulation products, provide materials complying with the testing and products requirements of UL GREENGUARD Gold Certification.

4. Installer to have minimum 5 years' experience in the business of installing insulation.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 FIRE HAZARD CLASSIFICATION
A. Maximum fire hazard classification of the composite insulation construction as installed to be not more than a Flame Spread Index (FSI) of 25 and Smoke Developed Index (SDI) of 50 as tested by current edition of ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) method.

B. Test pipe insulation in accordance with requirements of current edition of UL "Pipe and Equipment Coverings."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Type 1, Glass Wool Pipe Insulation:

1. Johns Manville

2. Knauf

3. Owens-Corning

4. Or approved equivalent.

B. Type 7, ADA Accessible Lavatory/Sink Insulation Kit:

1. IPS/Truebro

2. McGuire/Pro-Wrap

3. Plumberex/Pro-Extreme

4. Brocar Trap Wrap

5. Or approved equivalent.

C. Accessories:

1. ITW Insulation Systems

2. Or approved equivalent.

D. Pipe Fitting Insulation Covers:

1. Zeston Johns Manville

2. ITW Insulation Systems

3. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 TYPE 1, GLASS WOOL PIPE INSULATION
A. Glass Fiber: ASTM C547 Type I and IV; rigid molded, noncombustible.

1. Thermal Conductivity Value: 0.27 BTU*in/(hr*sf*F) at 75 degrees F.

2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F to 1000 degrees F.

3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: White Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber and bonded to aluminum foil, with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or vapor barrier mastic.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 491
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00-3

2.3 TYPE 7, ADA ACCESSIBLE LAVATORY/SINK INSULATION KIT A. P-traps, trap arms, tail pieces, hot water and cold water insulating guards meeting ASTM C1822. Molded closed cell insulation with vinyl cover and nylon fasteners, paintable. Provide accessories as required for complete installation covering all exposed waste piping, water piping, stops and supplies. Color white.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cement, sealers, mastics and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape corner angles, anchors, stud pins and metal covers as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. Accessories, i.e., adhesives, mastics, cements and tape to have same flame and smoke component ratings as insulation materials with which they are used. Shipping cartons to bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed those listed above. Provide permanent treatment of jackets or facings to impart flame and smoke safety. Provide non-water soluble treatments.

Provide UV protection recommended by manufacturer for outdoor installation.

2.5 PIPE FITTING INSULATION COVERS
A. PVC Plastic Fitting Covers: Schuller Zeston 2000, Knauf Proto Fitting or approved equivalent.

One-piece molded type fitting covers and jacketing material, gloss white. Connections: Tacks; pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION INFORMATION
A. Verification of Conditions:

1. Do not apply insulation until pressure testing and inspection of piping has been completed.

2. Examine areas and conditions under which insulation will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to be insulated.

C. Installation:

1. Insulation: Continuous through walls, floors, and partitions except where noted otherwise.

2. Piping and Equipment:
a. Install insulation over clean, dry surfaces with adjoining sections firmly butted together and covering surfaces. Fill voids and holes. Seal raw edges. Install insulation in a manner such that insulation may be split, removed, and reinstalled with vapor barrier tape on strainer caps and unions. Do not install insulation until piping has been leak tested and has passed such tests. Do not insulate manholes, equipment manufacturer's nameplates, handholes, and ASME stamps. Provide beveled edge at such insulation interruptions. Repair voids or tears.

D. Provide accessories as required. See Part 2 Article "Accessories" above.

E. Protection and Replacement: Protect installed insulation during construction. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 492
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00-4
F. Labeling and Marking: Provide labels, arrows and color coding on piping. Attach labels and flow direction arrows to jacketing per Section 22 05 53, Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

G. Insulation Shields: Provide hangers and shields (18 gauge minimum) outside of insulation for cold piping (<60 degrees F). Hot water piping hangers may penetrate insulation to contact pipe directly. Provide 18-inch long, noncompressible insulation section at insulation shields for lines 1-1/2-inches and larger (hot and cold piping).

H. Piping Surfaces to be Insulated:

Item to be Insulated
System
Insulation
Type
Pipe Size
Insulation
Thickness
Hot Water Piping Above
Grade
(105F to 140F)
1 <1-inch
=>1-inch
1-inch
1-1/2-inch
Hot Water Piping Above
Grade
(141F to 200F)
1 <1-1/2-inch
=>1-1/2-inch
1-1/2-inch
2-inch
Cold Water Piping Above
Grade
1 =<1-1/2-inch
>1-1/2-inch
1/2-inch
1-inch
ADA Accessible
Lavatory/Sink
7 All As Listed

3.2 TYPE 1, GLASS WOOL PIPE INSULATION
A. See General Installation Requirements above.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for below grade installation.

C. Lap seal insulation with waterproof adhesive. Do not use staples or other methods of attachment which would penetrate vapor barrier. Apply fitting covers with seated tacks and vapor barrier tape.

D. Apply insulation to pipe and seal with self-sealing lap. Use self-sealing butt strips to seal butt joints. Insulate fittings, valves and unions with single or multiple layers of insulation and cover to match pipe or use preformed PVC molded insulation covers.

3.3 TYPE 7, ADA ACCESSIBLE LAVATORY/SINK INSULATION KIT A. See General Installation Requirements above.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Provide lavatory/sink insulation kit. Install on waste fittings, hot and cold water stops and supplies.

3.4 ACCESSORIES
A. See General Installation Requirements above.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 493
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00-5
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Furnish and install accessories for all insulation types listed in this Section.

3.5 PIPE FITTING INSULATION COVERS
A. See General Installation Requirements above.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 494
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00-1
SECTION 22 10 00

PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Sanitary, Drainage DWV Piping, Above Grade

2. Pump Waste Pressure Piping (Pumped Discharge)

3. Hot and Cold Domestic Water Above Grade

4. Piping Specialties

5. Cleanouts

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 22, Plumbing and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. NSF 61, Annex G.

2. California Standard AB 1953.

3. Steel pipe to conform to ASTM and ANSI Standards as specified in this Section.

4. Copper piping to conform to ASTM B88, B306 and B208 and the standards of Copper Development Association (CDA), and American Welding Society, (AWS).

5. Cast Iron Piping to conform to standards of ASTM A-74, CISPI 301 and FM 1680.

6. Manufacturer's Standards Society (MSS) for valving and support reference standard.

7. American Water Works Association (AWWA) for Valving Assembly Standards.

8. American Society of Sanitation Engineers (ASSE) for Valving Standards.

9. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for Piping Standards.

10. NFPA Standard 51B - “Fire Prevention in Use of Cutting and Welding Processes.”

11. Crosslinked polyethylene (PEX) pipe conforming to ASTM F876, F877 and CSA B1375, or DIN 16892 and 16893.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 495
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. See component manufacturers listed in individual articles below.

B. ADS
C. American-USA
D. Cerro
E. Charlotte
F. Elkhart
G. Enfield
H. Ideal
I. Mifab
J. Mission
K. Mueller
L. Nibco
M. Sioux Chief
N. Tyler
O. Zurn
P. Or approved equivalent.

Q. Cleanouts:

1. J.R. Smith

2. Mifab

3. Sioux Chief

4. Wade

5. Watts

6. Zurn

7. Or approved equivalent.

R. Firestopping Penetrations in Fire Rated Wall Floor Assemblies:

1. Hilti

2. Proset

3. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 GENERAL
A. Provide pipe, tube, and fittings of the same type, fitting requirements, grade, class, and the size and weight indicated or required for each service, as indicated in other Division 22, Plumbing Specifications. Where type, grade, or class is not indicated, provide proper selection as October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 496
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00-3
determined by installer for installation requirements, and comply with governing regulations and industry standards.

B. Manufactured materials delivered, new to the project site and stored in their original containers.

C. Product Marking: Furnish each item with legible markings indicating name brand and manufacturer, manufacturing process, heat number and markings as required per ASTM and UL/FM Standards.

2.3 SANITARY, DRAINAGE DWV PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A888/CISPI 301 hubless.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.

2. Coupling Assembly:
a. Heavy Duty: ASTM C1540, Clamp-All Hi-Torq 125, Husky SD 4000, Mifab QXHUB, Mission HeavyWeight couplings.

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, DWV.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.29, wrought copper.

2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder.

2.4 PUMP WASTE PRESSURE PIPING (PUMPED DISCHARGE)
A. Above Grade: Type "L" copper with solder joints.

2.5 HOT AND COLD DOMESTIC WATER ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tube: 2-1/2-inches and smaller. ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), Drawn.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18 copper.

2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.

2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Pipe Escutcheons:

1. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime zinc base paint finish for unoccupied areas.

2. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide stainless steel, cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged.

3. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide stainless steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged.

B. Low Pressure Y-Type Pipeline Strainers:

1. Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system materials. Select strainers for 125 percent of the working pressure of piping system with Type 304 stainless steel screens made with 1/16-inch perforations on 4-inch and smaller strainers, and 1/8-inch perforations on 6-inch and larger strainers.

2. Threaded Ends, 2-inch and Smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with plus.

3. Flanged Ends, 2-1/2-inch and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with offcenter blowdown fitted with hose bibb.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 497
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00-4
C. Dielectric Waterways:

1. Provide standard products recommended by manufacturers in service indicated, which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (eliminating electrical conductance) to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.

2. Provide dielectric waterways or brass nipple fitting for transitions between dissimilar metal piping.

D. Unions:

1. Unions to comply with the following schedule:
a. Soldered Copper or Brass Pipe, 2-inch and smaller: 150 PSI cast bronzed or copper, ground joint, non-ferrous seat with soldered ends. b. Screwed Copper or Brass Pipe, 2-inch and smaller: 150 PSI cast brass, ground joint, brass to brass seat, threaded ends.

2.7 CLEANOUTS
A. Locate cleanouts as shown on Drawings and as required by local code. Cleanouts same size as pipe except that greater than 4-inches will not be required. Plastic components not allowed, except unless specifically noted.

B. Types:

1. Tile Floor Cleanouts: J. R. Smith 4020 with round heavy-duty nickel bronze top, taper thread, ABS plug and standard screws.

2. Wall Cleanout: J. R. Smith 4472-U, countersunk bronze taper thread plug, stainless steel shallow cover and vandalproof screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. General Installation:

1. Work performed by experienced journeyman plumbers. No exceptions.

2. Provide access panels for concealed valves, shock arrestors, trap primers and the like.

3. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices and manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Align piping accurately at connections, within 3/32-inch misalignment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.

5. Locate piping runs, as indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details, and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2-inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1-inch clearance outside insulation. Whenever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view by locating it in column enclosures, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated.
a. Do not run piping through transformer vaults, telephone, elevator, electrical or electronic equipment spaces or enclosures unless indicated on Drawings. b. Concealed Piping Above Suspended Ceiling: Plan and coordinate to avoid interferences; install to maintain suspended ceiling heights shown on Architectural Drawings. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels for panel removal. Locate piping so that valves are visible and accessible within 24-inches October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 498
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00-5
horizontally and vertically from point of access to the ceiling space. Provide plenum rated materials for ceiling spaces which are being used as plenums. c. Exposed Work: Run pipes parallel to the closest wall unless otherwise shown on Drawings; maintain maximum headroom; avoid light fixtures. d. Insulation Space Allowance: In piping work, allow space for pipe insulation and jackets. If interferences occur, move the piping to accommodate insulation thickness specified.
e. Pipe Lengths: Do not use short lengths or nipples at locations where a full length of pipe will fit.
f. Alignment Prior to Supporting and Anchoring: Place piping in proper alignment and position prior to connection to anchors, expansion loops, and equipment. Furnish jacking devices, temporary steel structural members, and assembled structures as necessary. Remove temporary equipment and structures supplied by contractor at completion; such items to remain Contractor property.
g. Valve and Equipment Connections: Piping not to place undue stress on flanged valves and equipment connections. Install mating flange faces true and parallel to each other and not requiring springing of piping for assembly. Pipe hangers and supports to carry the full weight of the pipe and fluid. h. Piping Leaks: Correct immediately; use new materials; leak-sealing compounds or peening not permitted.
i. Pressure Ratings of Fittings, Valves, and Devices in Piping Systems: Pressure rating to be equal to, or greater than, the maximum working pressure of the system.
j. Equipment Vents and Drains: Provide for coils and vessels which contain water.

Provide isolation valves and outlet valves at piping high and low points to permit venting and draining of the vessel without venting and draining connected piping.

Provide hose connections and caps on drain lines.
k. Escutcheon Plates: Where exposed insulated and uninsulated piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings; provide spring clip type. Provide plates on both sides of wall or floor.

B. Testing:

1. General:
a. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pumps, compressors, tanks, and gauges, as required. Test piping systems before insulation (if any) is installed and remove or disengage control devices before testing. Where necessary, test sections of each piping system independently, but do not use piping valves to isolate sections where test pressures exceed local valve operating pressure rating.

Fill each section with water, compressed air, or nitrogen and pressurize for the indicated pressure and time.
b. Notify Architect and local Plumbing Inspector 2 days before tests. c. Drainage, Waste and Vent Piping: Test in accordance with governing plumbing code or as follows: Test drainage and venting systems, with necessary openings plugged, to permit system to be filled with water and subjected to water pressure of minimum of 5 PSI head. System to hold water without water level drop greater than 1/2 pipe diameter of largest nominal pipe size within 24-hour period. Test system in sections if minimum head cannot be maintained in each section. 5 PSI head to be minimum pressure at highest joint.
d. Water Piping: Eliminate air from system. Fill and test at 125 PSIG or minimum 1- 1/2 times static pressure at connection to serving utility main for period of two hours with no loss in pressure.
e. Send test results to Architect for review and approval and include in Operation and Maintenance Manual.

2. Testing of Pressurized Systems:
a. Test each pressurized piping system at 150 percent of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 125 PSIG test pressure.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 499
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00-6
b. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 2 percent of test pressure.

3. Test hot and cold domestic water piping systems upon completion of rough-in and before connection to fixtures at hydrostatic pressure of 125 PSIG.

C. Protection:

1. Keep pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter. Protect piping, ductwork, fixtures, equipment and apparatus against dirty water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Restore to its original condition or replace fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of work.

D. Firestopping Penetrations in Fire-Rated Wall/Floor Assemblies:

1. Provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to accommodate penetration. Firestop voids between sleeve or core-drilled hole and pipe passing through to meet requirements of ASTM E814.

E. Cut piping squarely, free of rough edges and reamed to full bore. Insert piping fully into fittings.

F. Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.

G. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Remove excess cutting oil from piping prior to assembly. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

H. Sleeves:

1. Pipe Sleeves:
a. Layout work in advance of pouring concrete, furnish, and set sleeves necessary to complete work.
b. Floor Sleeves: Provide sleeves on pipes passing through concrete or masonry construction. Extend sleeve 1-inch above finished floor. Caulk pipes passing through floor with non-shrinking grout or approved caulking compound (except DWV Piping penetrating a concrete slab set on finish grade), provide modular link sealing system for concrete/slab penetrations which are below grade. Caulk/seal piping passing through fire rated building assembly with UL rated assemblies.

Provide fire-rated assemblies per local AHJ requirements c. Wall Sleeves: Provide sleeves on pipes passing through concrete or masonry construction. Provide sleeve flush with finished face of wall. Caulk pipes passing through walls with non-shrinking caulking compound. Provide modular link sealing system for concrete penetrations which are below grade. Caulk/seal piping passing through fire-rated assemblies per local AHJ requirements. d. Beam Sleeves: Coordinate with trades for locations of pipe sleeves in reinforced concrete and steel beams. Indicate penetrations on structural shop drawings. See Drawings and Specifications for specific sleeve location limitations. Plumbing Drawings are diagrammatic. Offset piping as required to meet these limitations.

Pipe sleeve locations must be indicated on reinforced concrete and steel beam shop drawings. Field cutting of beams not allowed without written approval of structural engineer. No extra costs allowed for failure to coordinate beam penetrations prior to reinforced concrete and steel beam shop drawing submittal.

2. Installation of metallic or plastic piping penetrations through non fire-rated walls and partitions and through smoke-rated walls and partitions:
a. Install fabricated pipe sleeve.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 500
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00-7
b. After installation of sleeve and piping, tightly pack entire annular void between piping or piping insulation and sleeve identification.
c. Seal each end airtight with a resilient nonhardening seal per code.

3. Piping penetrations through fire-rated (1 to 3 hour) assemblies:
a. Select and install pre-engineered pipe penetration system in accordance with UL listing and manufacturer's recommendation.
b. Provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to accommodate penetration. Firestop voids between sleeve or core-drilled hole and pipe passing through to meet requirements of ASTM E84.

3.2 SANITARY, DRAINAGE DWV PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Drainage, Waste and Vent Piping: Test in accordance with governing plumbing code or as follows: Test drainage and venting systems, with necessary openings plugged, to permit system to be filled with water and subjected to water pressure of minimum of 5 PSI head. System to hold water without water level drop greater than 1/2 pipe diameter of largest nominal pipe size within 24-hour period. Test system in sections if minimum head cannot be maintained in each section. 5 PSI head to be minimum pressure at highest joint.

B. Firestopping Penetrations in Fire-Rated Wall/Floor Assemblies:

C. Solder copper tube and fitting joints with lead free nickel/silver bearing solder meeting ASTM Std. B-32, in accordance with IAPMO Is 3-93, ASTM B-828 and Copper Development Association recommended procedures. Clean joints by other than chemical means prior to assembly. "Shock" cooling is prohibited. Fluxes to be water soluble for copper and brass potable water applications, and meeting CDA standard test method 1.0 and ASTM B813-91.

Apply solder until a full fillet is present around the joint. Do not apply solder and flux in such excessive quantities as to run down interior of pipe. Lead solder or corrosion flux not to be present at the jobsite.

D. Cast-Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standards and installation instructions.

E. Sanitary Drainage:

1. Grade piping at a uniform pitch of 2 percent unless otherwise noted on Drawings.

2. Indirect Waste or Drain Piping: Extend piping to discharge as shown on Drawings.

Maintain minimum air gap. Provide traps on indirect waste or drain piping exceeding 60- inches.

3. Drains:
a. Install drains to suit finished floor or roof surface. Install drains and components per manufacturer's instructions. Slope flooring to floor drain or sink a minimum of 1/2-inch below finished floor elevation.
b. Install P-traps for hub drains, floor drains and floor sinks. P-traps to be of the same materials as soil and waste piping. Provide trap primer assembly for each drain or floor sink.

4. Wall Access Panel: Secure to wall framing and install so that flange forms a close fitting joint with the finished wall surface.

5. Insulate horizontal branch lines from floor sinks, receptors and drains receiving cold discharge from equipment and appliances.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 501
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00-8

3.3 PUMP WASTE PRESSURE PIPING (PUMPED DISCHARGE)
A. Testing of Pressurized Systems:

1. Test each pressurized piping system at 150 percent of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 125 PSIG test pressure.

2. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 2 percent of test pressure.

B. Firestopping Penetrations in Fire-Rated Wall/Floor Assemblies:

C. Braze copper tube and fitting socket with BCuP series filler metal without flux. Use listed brazing flux for joining of copper tube to brass or bronze fittings, meeting AWS FB3A or FB3C. "Shock" cooling is prohibited. A continuous fillet is to be visible around the completed joint. After cooling, thoroughly remove flux residue with warm water and a brush prior to testing. Do not use BCuP filler on copper alloys containing over 10 percent nickel. Cap or plug piping during construction to prevent entry of foreign material.

D. Welders performing work under this Contract to be certified and qualified in accordance with tests prescribed by the National Certified Welding Bureau (NCWB) or by other approved test procedures using methodology and procedures covered in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators." Installation to conform to ANSI 31.1 "Power Piping."

1. Submit for approval the names, identification, and welder's assigned number, letter or symbol for welders assigned to this project.

2. Use the assigned identification symbol to identify the work of each welder and indelibly stamp immediately upon completion of each weld.

3. Welders to be tested and certified for all positions.

4. Submit identifying stenciled test coupons made by each operator.

5. Welders may be required to retake welding certification tests without additional expense.

6. When so requested, a welder will not be permitted to work as a welder on this project until he has been recertified in accordance with NCWB.

7. Recertification of the welder to be made after the welder has taken and passed the required tests.

E. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows:

1. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0F.

2. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5 degree angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove slag, metal particles, and dirt.

3. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1-inch long welds, 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10- inches, 8 welds for pipe sizes 12-inches to 20-inches.

4. Build up welds with a stringer-bead pass, followed by a hot pass, followed by a cover or filler pass. Eliminate valleys at center and at edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes, and non-metallic inclusions.

5. Do not weld out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures. Re-fabricate to comply with requirements.

6. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings whenever branch pipe is indicated, or install a regular T-fitting.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 502
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00-9

3.4 HOT AND COLD DOMESTIC WATER ABOVE GRADE
A. Water Piping: Eliminate air from system. Fill and test at 125 PSIG or minimum 1-1/2 times static pressure at connection to serving utility main for period of two hours with no loss in pressure.

B. Testing of Pressurized Systems:

1. Test each pressurized piping system at 150 percent of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 125 PSIG test pressure.

2. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 2 percent of test pressure.

C. Test hot and cold domestic water piping systems upon completion of rough-in and before connection to fixtures at hydrostatic pressure of 125 PSIG.

D. Firestopping Penetrations in Fire-Rated Wall/Floor Assemblies:

E. Solder copper tube and fitting joints with lead free nickel/silver bearing solder meeting ASTM Std. B-32, in accordance with IAPMO Is 3-93, ASTM B-828 and Copper Development Association recommended procedures. Clean joints by other than chemical means prior to assembly. "Shock" cooling is prohibited. Fluxes to be water soluble for copper and brass potable water applications, and meeting CDA standard test method 1.0 and ASTM B813-91.

F. Braze copper tube and fitting socket with BCuP series filler metal without flux. Use listed brazing flux for joining of copper tube to brass or bronze fittings, meeting AWS FB3A or FB3C. "Shock" cooling is prohibited. A continuous fillet is to be visible around the completed joint. After cooling, thoroughly remove flux residue with warm water and a brush prior to testing. Do not use BCuP filler on copper alloys containing over 10 percent nickel. Cap or plug piping during construction to prevent entry of foreign material.

G. Domestic Water:

1. "Piping" to include pipes, fittings, nipples, valves and accessories connected thereto.

2. Run piping generally parallel to the axis of the building, arranged to conform to the building requirements and to suit the necessities of clearance for other mechanical ducts, flues, conduits and work of other trades, and as close to ceiling or other construction as practical, free of unnecessary traps or bends.

3. Grade water supply piping for complete drainage of the system. Install hose bibbs at low points.

4. Use unions for piping connections to equipment.

5. Provide sufficient elbows, swings and offsets to permit free expansion and contraction.

6. Use reducers or increasers. Use no bushings.

7. Ream or file each pipe to remove burrs. Inspect each length of pipe and each fitting for workmanship and clear passageways.

8. Cover, cap or otherwise protect open ends of piping during construction to prevent damage to threads or flanges and prevent entry of foreign matter. Disinfect and sterilize water supply piping as specified. Furnish written report on final water quality results.

9. Install exposed connections to equipment with special care, showing no tool marks or threads at fittings and piping. No bowed or bent piping permitted.

10. Make ferrous to non-ferrous connections with dielectric fittings.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 503
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00-10

11. Use extra heavy pipe for nipples, where unthreaded portion is less than 1-1/2-inches.

Use no close nipples. Use only shoulder-type nipples.

12. Through-Wall Pipes: Type 'L' copper tubing for through-wall pipes which connect to exposed stops at wall surface. Anchor the pipes in the wall; attach pipe with U-bolts to steel back-up plates or steel angles anchored in the wall. Provide wrought copper elbow which securely anchors ears in wall at through-wall pipes.

13. Provide drain valves at base of risers and at low points on the system.

14. Backflow Preventers: Pipe relief to nearest drain. Slope at 2 percent.

H. Sterilization of Domestic Water System:

1. General: Upon completion of tests and necessary replacements, thoroughly flush and disinfect domestic water piping.

2. Method: After thoroughly flushing system with water to remove sediment, fill system with a solution containing 50 parts per million of chlorine for not less than 24 hours or 200 parts per million of chlorine for not less than 3 hours. After retention, drain, reflush and return system to service.

3. Certification: Provide copy of domestic water chlorination certificate in each operations and maintenance manual.

4. Provide water line disinfections performed by a licensed contractor with training in potable water line disinfections.

3.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Drainage, Waste, and Vent Piping: Test in accordance with governing plumbing code or as follows: Test drainage and venting systems, with necessary openings plugged, to permit system to be filled with water and subjected to water pressure of minimum of 5 PSI head. System to hold water without water level drop greater than 1/2 pipe diameter of largest nominal pipe size within 24-hour period. Test system in sections if minimum head cannot be maintained in each section. 5 PSI head to be minimum pressure at highest joint.

B. Cast-Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standards and installation instructions.

3.6 CLEANOUTS
A. Install in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, as required by code; at each change in direction of piping greater than 135 degrees; at minimum intervals of 100-feet; and at base of each vertical soil or waste stack. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping. Select type to match adjacent building finish. Provide shop drawings to Architect to coordinate locations and types of cleanouts with Architect prior to installation.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 504
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00-1
SECTION 22 30 00

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Water Heaters Tank-Less Electric

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 22, Plumbing and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Seismic anchor details and calculations signed and stamped by licensed California structural engineer with equipment data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. NSF 61, Annex G compliant.

2. ISO 9001 Certified.

3. IAPMO Low Lead Certification.

4. California Standard AB 1953.

C. Products approved for installation by state authorizing agency, no exceptions.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Water Heaters Tank-Less Electric:

1. Chronomite InstaFlow Micro Model M

2. EEMax

3. Stiebel Eltron
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 505
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00-2

4. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 GENERAL
A. Reference Drawings for capacities and specific model numbers.

2.3 WATER HEATERS TANK-LESS ELECTRIC
A. System: Domestic water.

B. Factory assembled packaged tank-less electric water heater utilizing microprocessor for temperature control. Heat water ways with high temperature coil electrical heating elements. 150 PSI working pressure. Cast aluminum or steel jacket with baked enamel finish. Pilot light to indicate when unit is operating. Prewire heaters ready for single electrical connection and bear UL label. Heater capable of operation within minimum and maximum operating flow rates and pressures of fixtures served and system operating pressure PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Examine areas and conditions under which equipment is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

C. Orients so controls and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate access.

D. Certificates: Submit appropriate Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report as required by provisions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

E. Connect water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions.

F. Equipment Rigging: Heavy duty rigging eye bolts for Crosby Group swivel hoist rings installed over pump access covers for removal or maintenance.

G. Equipment Start-Up:

1. Start-up, test, and adjust equipment in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Check and calibrate controls.

2. Start-up performed by authorized manufacturer's representative or agent. Provide credentials of start-up personnel to Architect and Owner's Authorized Representative for approval.

3. Remove and replace filters when start-up testing is executed.

4. Manufacturer adjusts operating parameters of equipment to compensate to elevation of 500-feet above sea level.

5. Architect, Commissioning Agent, and Owner's Authorized Representative will be notified 10 days prior to start-up and will be present at start-ups.

6. Provide written report from manufacturer's representative on results of start-up within 48 hours.

7. Technical Training of maintenance staff includes two hours minimum per each piece of equipment.

8. Seismic Verification:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 506
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00-3
a. Contractor will retain structural engineer who will submit stamped and signed anchoring and restraint details on plumbing equipment with submittal data in accordance with Division 22, Plumbing requirements.
b. Contractor's Structural Engineer will test and verify in writing that seismic restraints have been installed in accordance with their details.

3.2 WATER HEATERS TANK-LESS ELECTRIC
A. Examine areas and conditions under which equipment is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Orients so controls and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate access.

D. Certificates: Submit appropriate Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report as required by provisions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

E. Connect water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 507
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00-1
SECTION 22 40 00

PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. General Plumbing Fixtures:
a. China Fixtures, White Only
b. Enameled Steel Fixtures, White Only
c. Faucet Fittings
d. Stainless Steel Fixtures
e. Thermostatic Mixing Valves

2. Fixture Trim

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 22, Plumbing and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Comply with lead free (less than or equal to 0.25 percent) products in drinking water systems.

2. NSF 61, Annex G, Drinking Water System Components, Compliant.

3. ISO 9001, Quality Management Standard Certified.

4. IAPMO Low Lead Certification.

5. California Standard Assembly Bill AB 1953, No-Lead Law

6. Provide fixtures, faucets and accessories to meet barrier free requirements of the governing code with respect to plumbing fixtures provided for the physically handicapped.

7. Items approved for use by State of California.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 508
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. "Or approved equivalent" as defined in 22 00 00, Plumbing Basic Requirements. Substitution process requirements apply to approved equivalent products.

B. General Plumbing Fixtures: See Schedule on Drawings for type.

1. China Fixtures - White Only:
a. American Standard
b. Briggs
c. Crane
d. Eljer
e. Kohler
f. Universal-Rundle
g. Or approved equivalent.

2. Enameled Steel Fixtures - White Only:
a. American Standard
b. Briggs
c. Crane
d. Eljer
e. Kohler
f. Universal-Rundle
g. Or approved equivalent.

3. Faucet Fittings:
a. Public:
1) American Standard
2) Chicago
3) Delta Commercial
4) Moen Commercial
5) Sloan
6) Symmons
7) T & S Brass
8) Or approved equivalent.

4. Stainless Steel Fixtures:
a. Elkay
b. Haws
c. Just
d. Or approved equivalent.

5. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:
a. Bradley
b. Powers
c. Symmons
d. Holby
e. Or approved equivalent.

C. Fixture Trim:

1. McGuire

2. Dearborn Brass

3. Oatey

4. Or approved equivalent.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 509
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00-3

2.2 GENERAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Review substitution request requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and 22 00 00, Plumbing General Requirements.

B. Reference Architectural Details for mounting height and location of fixtures.

C. Provide factory fabricated fixtures of type, style and material indicated on the plumbing fixture connection schedule shown on the Drawings. For each type fixture, provide fixture manufacturer's standard trim, carrier, seats, and valves as indicated by their published product information; either as designed and constructed, or as recommended by manufacturer, or required for complete installation. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is installer's option; but, fixtures of same type must be furnished by a single manufacturer. Where type is not otherwise indicated, provide fixtures complying with governing regulations.

D. Provide fixtures complete with fittings, supports, fastening devices, bolt caps, faucets, valves, traps, stops and appurtenances.

E. Plumbing Fixture Thermostatic Mixing Valves:

1. Sinks serviced with a single ASSE 1070 mixing valve or multiple sinks served by a single ASSE 1070 mixing valve.

2.3 FIXTURE TRIM
A. Traps: Provide heavy duty commercial grade traps on fixtures except fixtures with integral traps.

Exposed traps will be chromium plated cast brass or 17 gauge chromium plated brass tubing.

1. Sink: McGuire 8912CDF.

2. Lavatory: McGuire 8902CDF.

B. Supplies and Stops: Lead free heavy duty commercial grade, chrome plated with brass stems.

Stops: T-handle or Loose Key type.

1. Lavatory: McGuire LFH2165LK.

2. Sink: McGuire LFH2167LK.

3. Water Closets: McGuire.

C. Lavatory Grid Strainer: McGuire 155A.

D. Sink Grid Strainer: McGuire 152N.

E. Shower Grid Strainer: McGuire 1266.

F. Sink Basket Strainer: McGuire 151.

G. Trim barrier-free wrap for P-traps and supplies by McGuire, Pro-Wrap, Plumberex or Truebro.

H. Escutcheons: McGuire wrought brass deep bell.

I. Wax Rings and Toilet Bolts: WM Harvey No Seep No. 1 053065-N.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION INFORMATION
A. Verification of Conditions:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 510
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00-4

1. Examine rough-in work of water supply and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures. Examine floors and substrates, and conditions under which fixture work is to be accomplished. Correct any incorrect locations of piping and other unsatisfactory conditions for installation of plumbing fixtures.

2. Examine walls, floors and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.

3. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings and pertinent codes and regulations, design and referenced standards.

4. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behind or within wall construction to provide rigid installation.

5. Install a stop valve in a readily accessible location in water connection to each fixture.

6. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.

7. Seal fixtures to walls and floors using silicone sealant Dow Corning No. 780 or approved equivalent. Match sealant color to fixture color.

8. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest.

9. Inspect each unit for damage prior to installation. Replace damaged fixtures.

10. Replace washers or cartridges of leaking or dripping faucets and stops.

11. Clean fixtures, trim and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials.

12. During construction, cover installed fixtures, drains, sinks and water coolers with cardboard and wrap with sheet plastic.

13. Provide trap primers for floor drains, floor sinks, trench drains and hub drains.

14. Install roof and overflow roof drains per architectural details. Cover drains during roof construction to protect drain. Provide offsets or expansion joints at each roof/overflow drain.

15. Do not use lead flashing.

B. Owner Furnished Equipment:

1. Rough-in and make final connections to Owner furnished equipment. Provide necessary items to complete installation.

2. Comply with requirements of this Section and Drawings for installation procedures.

C. Adjusting and Cleaning: Clean plumbing fixtures, trim, and strainers of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves and flush valves to provide proper flow stream and specified GPM. Repair leaks at faucets and stops.

D. Extra Stock: Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing fixtures and trim to Owner.

E. Field Quality Control: Upon completion of installation of plumbing fixtures, test fixtures to demonstrate capability and compliance with Specifications. Correct or replace malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.

F. Protection: Protect fixtures and equipment from damage. Cover finished fixtures with cardboard and sheet plastic. Fixtures are not to be used during construction. Replace damaged items with new.

G. Signage: For fixtures that do not have ASSE 1070 mixing valve protection for hot water temperature, provide signage per Section 22 05 53, Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 511
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00-5

3.2 FIXTURE TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved product data submittals.

B. Set plumb, level and rigid.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 512
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS 23 00 00-1
SECTION 23 00 00

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work included in 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements applies to Division 23, HVAC work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems for proposed project.

C. Definitions:

1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation.

4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent", substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Section applies to Division 23, HVAC Contract Documents.

B. Related Work:

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards per Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 23, HVAC Sections and those listed in this Section.

B. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 513
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS 23 00 00-2

1. ABA - Architectural Barriers Act

2. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association

3. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act

4. AHRI - Air-Conditioning Heating & Refrigeration Institute

5. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association

6. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

7. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers

8. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers

9. ASHRAE Guideline 0, The Commissioning Process

10. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers

11. ASPE - American Society of Plumbing Engineers

12. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering

13. ASTM - ASTM International

14. AWWA - American Water Works Association

15. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing & Mechanical Officials

16. ISO - International Organization for Standardization

17. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society

18. NEC - National Electric Code

19. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association

20. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association

21. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation

22. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration

23. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc.

D. See Division 23, HVAC individual Sections for additional references.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures as well as specific individual Division 23, HVAC Sections.

B. Provide drawings in format and software release equal to the design documents. Drawings to be the same sheet size and scale as the Contract Documents.

C. In addition:

2. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format only. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail and be native/searchable PDF format. Scanned October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 514
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS 23 00 00-3
copies are not acceptable. For electronic format, provide one file per division containing one bookmarked PDF file with each bookmark corresponding to each Specification Section. Arrange bookmarks in ascending order of Specification Section number.

Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. All transmissions/submissions to be submitted to Architect. Deviations will be returned without review.

3. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 23, HVAC Sections.

Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed items. Highlight connections by/to other trades.
b. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for products, fixtures, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided.

Reference individual Division 23, HVAC Specification Sections for specific items required in product data submittal outside of these requirements. c. For vibration isolation of equipment, list make and model selected with operating load and deflection.
d. See Division 23, HVAC individual Sections for additional submittal requirements outside of these requirements.

5. Maximum of two reviews of submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; bear costs of these additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to contractor without review.

6. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment. Provide engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification. Equipment Importance Factor as specified in Division 01 and in Structural documents.

7. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required by Division 23, HVAC Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26, Electrical submittals.

8. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment.

9. Substitutions and Variation from Basis of Design:
a. The Basis of Design designated product establishes the qualities and characteristics for the evaluation of any comparable products by other listed acceptable manufacturers if included in this Specification or included in an approved Substitution Request as judged by the Design Professional. b. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties proposing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor is required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base Bid, including resulting charges for work performed under other Divisions, will be allowed for such revisions.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 515
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS 23 00 00-4
Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals." For any product marked "or approved equivalent," a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to bid.

10. Shop Drawings: Provide coordinated shop drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, equipment, ductwork and piping layout plans, and control wiring diagrams. Reference individual Division 23, HVAC Specification Sections for additional requirements for shop drawings outside of these requirements. a. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations for items that require Code or maintenance access, size and elevation for approval prior to installation.

11. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual Sections.

13. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owner's Instructions:
a. Submit, at one time, electronic files (native/searchable PDF format) of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring servicing. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment.
1) Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project.
2) Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes, quantities, relevant to each piece of equipment: belts, motors, lubricants, and filters.
3) Include Warranty per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and individual Sections.
4) Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. 5) Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and sub assemblies.
6) Include copy of startup and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. 7) Include copy of final air and water systems balancing log along with pump, fan and distribution system operating data.
8) Include commissioning reports.
9) Include copy of valve charts/schedules.
10) Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format. Contractor must arrange for additional reviews; Contractor to bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.
b. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual Sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements Article titled "Demonstration." October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 516
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS 23 00 00-5
c. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, letter of conformance and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.

14. Record Drawings:
a. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording “As-constructed” conditions. Indicate on drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements, location of cleanouts, and location of concealed mechanical items. Include items changed by field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions.
b. Record Drawings are to include equipment and fixture/connection schedules, control dampers, fire smoke dampers, fire dampers, valves, bottom of pipe, duct and equipment elevations and dimensioned locations for all distribution systems (hydronic and air). Invert elevations and dimensioned locations for underground systems below grade to 5-feet outside building that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project.
c. At completion of project, input changes to original project Revit Model and make one set of black-line drawings created from Revit Model in version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit Revit Model and drawings upon substantial completion. d. See Division 23, HVAC individual Sections for additional items to include in record drawings.

C. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis of Design manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (i.e., piping) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis of Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturers' written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work.

E. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

F. Provide products that are UL listed.

G. Piping and duct insulation products to contain less than 0.1 percent by weight PBDE in all insulating materials.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 517
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS 23 00 00-6

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00, Contracting and Procurement Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and individual Division 23, HVAC Sections.

B. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01, General Requirements and the General Conditions.

Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

1.7 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to construction, prepare and submit coordinated layout drawings (composite drawings), to coordinate installation and location of ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, fire sprinklers, plumbing, lights, and electrical services. Composite Drawings show services on single sheet.

B. Prepare Drawings as follows:

1. Drawings in Revit model. Revit model release equal to design documents. Drawings to be same sheet size and scale as Contract Drawings and indicate location, size, and elevation above finished floor of equipment and distribution systems.

2. Review and revise, as necessary, section cuts in Contract Drawings after verification of field conditions.

3. Indicate hydronic and air distribution system piping including fittings, hangers, access panels, valves, and bottom of pipe and duct elevations above finished floor.

5. Incorporate Addenda items and change orders.

6. Distribute drawings to trades and provide additional coordination as requested by other trades.

C. Advise Architect in event conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise Architect of conflict.

E. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of project.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 518
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS 23 00 00-7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer, including but not limited to pumps, fans, valves, control devices, air handlers, vibration isolation devices, etc.

2.2 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL or ETL listed and labeled or be approved by State, County, and City authorities prior to procurement and installation.

B. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.

C. Hazardous Materials:

1. Comply with local, State of California, and Federal regulations relating to hazardous materals.

2. Comply with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements for this project relating to hazardous materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and individual Division 23, HVAC Sections.

B. Install equipment having components requiring access (i.e., drain pans, drains, control operators, valves, motors and vibration isolation devices) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage.

C. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions including all appurtenances recommended in manufacturer's installation instructions, at no additional charge to Owner. Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing and coordination with other trades and disciplines.

D. Earthwork:

1. Confirm Earthwork requirements in Contract Documents. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 23, HVAC Sections and the following:
a. Perform excavation, dewatering, shoring, bedding, and backfill required for installation of work in this Division in accordance with related earthwork Sections.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 519
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS 23 00 00-8
Contact utilities and locate existing utilities prior to excavation. Repair any work damaged during excavation or backfilling.
b. Excavation: Do not excavate under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls. c. Provide protection of underground systems. Review the project Geotechnical Report for references to corrosive or deleterious soils which will reduce the performance or service life of underground systems materials.

E. Firestopping:

1. Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 23, HVAC Sections and the following:
a. Coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping, ductwork and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

F. Pipe Installation:

1. Provide installation of piping systems coordinated to account for expansion and contraction of piping materials and building, as well as anticipated settlement or shrinkage of building. Install work to prevent damage to piping, equipment, and building and its contents. Provide piping offsets, loops, seismic flexible joints, expansion joints, sleeves, anchors or other means to control pipe movement and minimize forces on piping. Verify anticipated settlement and/or shrinkage of building with Project Structural Engineer. Verify construction phasing, type of building construction products and rating for coordinating installation of piping systems.

2. Include provisions for servicing and removal of equipment without dismantling piping.

G. Plenums:

1. Plenums: Materials within plenums shall be noncombustible or shall have a flame spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke-developed index of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or UL 723. Immediately notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancy.

H. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment, piping, and ductwork.

3.2 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, Structural documents, Section 23 0548, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment, and individual Division 23 HVAC Sections.

B. General:

1. Earthquake resistant designs for HVAC (Division 23) equipment and distribution, i.e. motors, ductwork, piping, equipment, etc. to conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 520
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS 23 00 00-9

C. Piping and Ductwork:

1. Per CBC or local requirements.

D. Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of mechanical equipment during earthquake.

3.3 REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
A. Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and individual Division 23, HVAC Sections.

B. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that they may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation:

1. Underground system installation prior to backfilling.

2. Prior to covering walls.

3. Prior to ceiling cover/installation.

4. After major equipment is installed.

5. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ.

C. Final Punch:

1. Prior to requesting a final punch visit from the Engineer, request from Engineer the Mechanical Precloseout Checklist, complete the checklist confirming completion of systems’ installation, and return to Engineer. Request a final punch visit from the Engineer, upon Engineer’s acceptance that the mechanical systems are ready for final punch.

2. Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the To Be DeterminedContractor.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Confirm Cutting and Patching requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 23, HVAC Sections and the following:

3. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting.

Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout.

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 521
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS 23 00 00-10
painting walls, ceilings, etc. where existing conduit and devices are removed as part of this project. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and walks, surfaces to be repaired, refinished and left in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work.

5. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.5 EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY
A. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner.

B. Maintain design intent where equipment other than as shown as Basis of Design in Contract Documents is provided. Where equipment requires ductwork or piping arrangement, controls/control diagrams, or sequencing different from that indicated in Contract Documents, provide at no additional cost to Owner.

1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Insulation and lining that becomes wet from improper storage and handling to be replaced before installation. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt, and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be replaced before installation.

2. Protect equipment and pipe to avoid damage. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs.

Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.

3. Protect bright finished shafts, bearing housings and similar items until in service.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and individual Division 23, HVAC Sections.

Provide field instruction to Owner's Maintenance Staff as specified in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and individual Division 23, HVAC Sections.

3.8 CLEANING
A. Confirm Cleaning requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and individual Division 23, HVAC Sections.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 522
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS 23 00 00-11
B. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work.

3.9 START UP
A. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.

Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

1. Do not place equipment in sustained operation prior to initial balancing of HVAC systems.

3.10 PAINTING
A. Confirm Painting requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 09, Finishes.

In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 23, HVAC Sections and the following:

1. Ferrous Metal: After completion of work, thoroughly clean and paint exposed supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces in mechanical rooms, i.e., hangers, hanger rods, equipment stands, with one coat of black asphalt varnish for exterior or black enamel for interior, suitable for hot surfaces.

2. After acceptance by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), In a mechanical room, on roof or other exposed areas, machinery and equipment not painted with enamel to receive two coats of primer and one coat of rustproof enamel, colors as selected by Architect.

3. See individual equipment Specifications for other painting.

4. Structural Steel: Repair damage to structural steel finishes or finishes of other materials damaged by cutting, welding or patching to match original.

5. Piping and Ductwork: Clean, primer coat and paint exposed piping and ductwork on roof or at other exterior locations with two coats paint suitable for metallic surfaces and exterior exposures. Color selected by Architect.

6. Covers: Covers such as manholes, cleanouts and the like will be furnished with finishes which resist corrosion and rust.

3.11 DEMOLITION
A. Confirm requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 02, Existing Conditions. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 23, HVAC Sections and the following:

1. Scope:
a. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and adjustments to the HVAC system required to meet code, and accommodate installation of new work.
b. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access or access to different areas. c. Existing Conditions: Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to exactly locate and preserve utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings.

3. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove exposed, unused ductwork and piping to behind finished surfaces (floor, walls, ceilings, etc.). Cap and patch surfaces to match surrounding finish.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 523
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS 23 00 00-12

1. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following:
a. Testing and Balancing Reports
b. Cleaning
c. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
d. Training of Operating Personnel
e. Record Drawings
f. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates
g. Start-up/Test Document
h. Commissioning Reports
B. Reference State of California requirements for specific testing procedures and documentation requirements. Comply with State and local governmental standards and requirements for testing, and completion and submittal of appropriate forms as required by Title 24 and local governmental agencies related to this work.

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Confirm Field Quality Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and individual Division 23, HVAC Sections.

B. Tests:

3.14 LETTER OF CONFORMANCE
A. Provide Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties with a statement that HVAC items were installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, UL listings and FM Global approvals. Include Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

3.15 ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS
A. Where equipment motors are to be electrically interlocked with other equipment for simultaneous operation, utilize equipment wiring diagrams to coordinate with electrical systems so that proper wiring of equipment involved is affected.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 524
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(HVAC) BASIC REQUIREMENTS 23 00 00-13

3.16 TEMPORARY HEATING, COOLING AND HUMIDITY CONTROL
A. Provide temporary heating, cooling, controls, humidification and dehumidification as required to facilitate the construction of the project. Size and select temporary system based on the requirements of the various trades during construction. This includes, but is not limited to, drywall, case work, wood flooring and wood finishes that are subject to warping. Size and install system to prevent mold growth. Coordinate the location of the temporary system. The house system can be used. Develop a procedure for how the house system will be used including a sketch depicting the house system, how filtration will be used to prevent construction debris from entering the system and how often the filters will be changed, how the ductwork will be cleaned after use to ensure a clean system is turned over to the Owner and how the units are sized. Submit this procedure to the Mechanical Engineer for review. Follow National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) duct cleaning procedures and guidelines. Warranties for the house system, if new, to commence when the Owner moves in if house system is used as the means to maintain the climate within the building during construction. Include this warranty requirement in the original bid or proposal amount. Coordinate and provide any temporary power, controls, ductwork, piping, plumbing anchorage, miscellaneous steel and structural supports required to support the temporary system. Installation of the system to comply with all applicable codes and be acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 525
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19-1
SECTION 23 05 19

METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Separable Sockets

2. Thermometer Wells

3. Test Plugs

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Maintenance Materials:
a. Extra gauge Oil for Inclined Manometers: One bottle. b. Extra Pressure Gauges: One.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEPARABLE SOCKETS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Kimray

2. Weiss

3. Trerice
B. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold fixed thermometer stem.

1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 526
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19-2

3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2-inches, but not less than thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not insulated.

4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.

5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.

6. Heat Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

2.2 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Ashcroft

2. Omega

3. Weiss
B. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold test thermometer.

1. Material: Brass for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.

3. Extension Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2-inches, but not less than thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not insulated.

4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.

5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.

6. Heat Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

2.3 TEST PLUGS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Pete's Plug

2. Or approved equivalent.

B. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in NPS 1/2 (DN15) fitting.

C. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.

D. Pressure Rating: 500 PSIG (3450 kPa) minimum.

E. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing valves, suitable for inserting 1/8-inch OD probe from dialtype thermometer or pressure gauge.

F. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil and Gas: 20 to 200 degrees F (minus 7 to plus 93 degrees Celsius), chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

G. Test Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.

H. Test Kit: Pressure gauge and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers, and carrying case.

1. Pressure Gauge and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the system's operating conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 527
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19-3

3.2 SEPARABLE SOCKETS
A. Inspect the openings in the vessel for foreign material and clean the connection ports to remove scale, chips and debris.

B. Install thermostats with separable sockets. Install the separable socket using good piping practice. Be sure to use TFE tape or pipe thread sealant on external pipe threads.

C. Never stand directly over or in front of a valve or controller when the system is pressurized.

D. Assure the separable socket is completely submerged in liquid or flow stream. Partial submersion will give erratic temperature transfer to thermostat.

E. Pack separable socket full with high temp bearing grease. This helps in heat transfer and prevents air space.

3.3 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Install in piping in vertical upright position. Fill well with oil or graphite, secure cup.

3.4 TEST PLUGS
A. Locate test plugs adjacent to thermometers and thermometer sockets, adjacent to pressure gauges and pressure gauge taps, adjacent to control device sockets, or where indicated.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 528
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23-1
SECTION 23 05 23

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Balancing Valves

2. Ball Valves

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from a single source and from a single manufacturer.

B. Valves, General:

1. Apollo

2. Armstrong

3. ASCO

4. Cla-Val

5. Conbraco

6. Crane

7. Clow

8. Griswold

9. Hammond

10. Hays

11. Jenkins
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 529
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23-2

12. Josam

13. Kennedy

14. Milwaukee

15. Mueller

16. Nibco

17. Red-White Valve

18. Smith

19. Stockham

20. Tour & Andersson

21. Wade

22. Watts

23. Wilkins

24. Zurn
C. Balancing Valves:

1. Griswold

2. Hays

3. Armstrong CBV

4. Tour & Andersson

5. Victaulic (T&A Valves only)
D. Ball Valves:

1. See Valves General above.

2. NSF Valves:
a. Clow
b. Kennedy
c. Nibco

2.2 VALVES - GENERAL
A. General:

1. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.

2. Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarterturn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves 6 inches and smaller. Provide gear operators for quarter-turn valves 8 inches and larger and plug valves 5 inches and larger.

Provide chain-operated sheaves and chains for overhead valves installed over 5 feet above finished floor.

3. Valve Identification: Manufacturer's name (or trademark) and pressure rating clearly marked on valve body.

B. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extension and following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation and memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. a. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements. Provide NIBCO NIB-SEAL handle extension or comparable product by one of the following. 1) Conbraco Industries, Inc. (Apollo Div.)
C. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves.

2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

3. Threaded: With thread according to ASME B1.20.1.

D. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 530
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23-3

2.3 BALANCING VALVES
A. Maximum 125 PSIG System Working Water Pressure.

B. Manual Set Balancing Valves:

1. Valves are to be of the "Y" pattern, equal percentage globe-style and provide three functions:
a. Precise flow measurement.
b. Precision flow balancing.
c. Positive drip-tight shutoff.

2. Valve to provide multi-turn, 360 degree adjustment with micrometer type indicators located on the valve handwheel. Valves have a minimum of four full 360 degree handwheel turns. 90 degree style ball valves are not acceptable. Valve handle to have hidden memory feature, which will provide a means for locking the valve position after the system is balanced. Valves to be furnished with precision machined venturi built into the valve body to provide highly accurate flow measurement and flow balancing. The Venturi to have two 1/4-inch threaded brass metering ports with check valves and gasketed caps located on the inlet side of the valve. The valve body, stem and plug to be brass. The handwheel to be high-strength resin.

3. 2-1/2-Inches and Larger: Valve body to be either cast iron with integrated cast iron flanges (2-1/2-inch to 12-inch) or ductile iron with industrial standard grooved ends (2- 1/2-inch to 12-inch). Valve stem and plug disc to be bronze with handwheel that permits multi-turn adjustments. Sizes 2-1/2-inch and 3-inch: five turns; sizes 4-inch to 6-inch: 6 turns; sizes 8-inch to 10-inch: 12 turns; and size 12-inch: 14 turns. Provide flange adapters to prevent rotation.

C. Automatic Balance Valve:

1. 1/2-Inch and Larger: Construction and attachment style as required by piping system.

Internal working parts and removable flow cartridge to be stainless steel. Valves be factory set and automatically limit flow to specified capacities with 5 percent plus or minus accuracy over entire operating pressure differential.

2.4 BALL VALVES
A. Ball valves on brazed piping are to be three-piece.

B. 2-1/2-Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, 400-600 PSI, two-piece full port ball configuration, bronze body, extended soldered ends for copper pipe and threaded ends for iron pipe, lead-free brass or stainless steel ball, lead-free brass stem, Teflon seat, extended steel handle. Apollo 77CLF 100 Series two-piece.

C. 3-Inches and Larger: MSS SP-110, 400-600 PSI, three-piece full port ball configuration, bronze body, extended soldered ends for copper pipe and threaded ends for iron pipe, lead-free brass or stainless steel ball, lead-free brass stem, Teflon seat, extended steel handle. Apollo 82- 100/82A 140 Series three-piece.

D. Full Port Ball Valve: 2- to 4-inch ductile iron, ASTM A536, micro finish steel chrome plated or stainless steel ball and stem. TFE seats, 600 PSI.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL VALVE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 531
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23-4

2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.

3. Set angle valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Inspect the shipping container before unpacking to look for damage that could have occurred during transport, and report it to the transportation company immediately. After visual inspection, remove the valve from the shipping container. Make sure the faces are free of any scratches and that there is not any obvious damage to the actuator assembly or valve body.

C. Make sure to note the valve's model number during the unpacking process. The model number will need to be provided when purchasing replacement parts.

D. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

E. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

G. Install valves per manufacturer's recommendations.

H. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.

I. Purge and clean piping to be connected to valve.

J. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with hose end adapter and cap on chain for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane. Ensure installation provides full stem movement.

K. Determine that the valve and its piping is adequately supported when installed. If a valve is not adequately supported, this could prevent the valve from operating and sealing correctly. Be sure that mating flanges are in line and parallel to minimize straining on joints and valve body.

L. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended stem valves, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation.

M. Mechanical Actuators: Install with chain operators where indicated. Extend chains to 5-feet above floor and hook to clips to clear aisle passage.

N. Stem Selection: Outside screw and yoke stems, except provide inside screw, nonrising stem where space prevents full opening of OS&Y valves.

O. Seats: Renewable seats, except where otherwise indicated.

P. When soldering, use paste flux that is approved by the manufacturer for use with lead-free alloys.

Q. Valve Adjusting and Cleaning:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 532
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23-5

1. Inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace valve if leak persists.

2. Valve Identification: Tag valves per Section 23 05 53, Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment.

R. General Requirements for Valve Applications:

1. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
a. Shutoff Service: Ball valves.
b. Throttling Service: Balancing valves.
c. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:
1) 2 Inches and Smaller: Swing or spring-loaded lift check valves with bronze disc.
2) 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Swing check valves with lever and weight or with spring or wafer - seat check valves.
d. Provide isolation valve, check valve, automatic flow control valve and balancing valve on discharge side of pumps where indicated. Combination triple duty valves not allowed. Provide isolation valve and strainer on suction side of pump.

2. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

3. Valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections. a. For Copper Tubing 2-Inches and Smaller: Threaded ends. b. For Copper Tubing 2-1/2-Inches to NPS 4-Inches: Flanged ends. c. For Copper Tubing 5-Inches and Larger: Flanged ends. d. For Steel Piping 2-Inches and Smaller: Threaded ends. e. For Steel Piping 2-1/2-Inches to NPS 4-Inches: Flanged ends. f. For Steel Piping 5-Inches and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.2 BALANCING VALVES INSTALLATION
A. See General Installation Requirements above.

B. Install with flow in the direction of the arrow on the valve body and install at least five pipe diameters downstream from any fitting, and at least ten pipe diameters downstream from any pump. Two pipe diameters downstream from the balancing valve should be free of any fittings.

When installed, easy and unobstructed access to the valve handwheel and metering ports for adjustment and measurement are to be provided. Install devices in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to automatically balance flow in piping loops as indicated.

C. For venturi valves less than 1-1/2-inch pipe size, provide valve sized for flow to coil. Provide transitions on both inlet and outlet of valve if valve is less than line size.

3.3 BALL VALVES INSTALLATION
A. See General Installation Requirements above.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 533
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING,
DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29-1
SECTION 23 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment

2. Building Attachments

3. Flashing

4. Miscellaneous Metal and Materials

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. ASCE 7-16, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

2. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90 "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports".

3. Install ductwork and piping per SMACNA's requirements.

4. Hanger spacing installation and attachment to meet all manufacturer's requirements and MSS SP-58.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Welding:
a. Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

2. Welding for Hangers:
a. Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D9.1, Sheet Metal Welding Code for duct joint and seam welding.

3. Engineering Responsibility:
a. Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe support, trapeze, duct support, equipment hangers/supports, support from floor structure, roof structure or from structure above, and seismic restraint by a qualified Structural Professional Engineer.
1) Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and who is October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 534
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING,
DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29-2
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.

Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

4. Manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of bolted metal framing support systems, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

5. Support systems to be supplied by a single manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide pipe, ductwork and equipment hangers and supports in accordance with the following:

1. When supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints for equipment, and supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints for conduit, piping, and ductwork are not shown on the Drawings, the contractor is responsible for their design.

2. Connections to structural framing not to introduce twisting, torsion, or lateral bending in the framing members. Provide supplementary steel as required.

B. Engineered Support Systems:

1. Support frames such as pipe racks or stanchions for piping, ductwork, and equipment which provide support from below.

2. Equipment, ductwork and piping support frame anchorage to supporting slab or structure.

C. Provide channel support systems, for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

D. Provide heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

E. Provide seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping, ductwork and equipment. See Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment.

F. Obtain approval from AHJ for seismic restraint hanger and support system to be installed for piping and equipment. See Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment:

1. Anvil International

2. B-Line Systems, Inc.

3. Erico Company, Inc.

4. Nelson-Olsen Inc.

5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.

6. Snappitz Thermal Pipe Shield Manufacturing

7. Unistrut Corporation
B. Building Attachments:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 535
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING,
DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29-3

1. Anchor-It

2. Gunnebo Fastening Corporation

3. Hilti Corporation

4. ITW Ramset/Red Head

5. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.

2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT A. Hanger Rods: Hanger rods continuously threaded or threaded ends only in concealed spaces and threaded ends only in exposed spaces; finish electro-galvanized or cadmium-plated in concealed spaces and prime painted in exposed spaces; sizes per MSS.

B. Hanger Rod Couplings: Anvil Figure 136, B-Line Figure B3220, or approved equivalent; malleable iron rod coupling with elongated center sight gap for visual inspection; to have same finish as hanger rods.

C. Channel Hanging System:

1. Framing members No. 12 gauge formed steel channels, 1-5/8-inch square, conforming to ASTM A1011 Grade 33, one side of channel to have a continuous slot within turned lips; framing nut with grooves and spring 1/2-inch size, conforming to ASTM 675 GR60; screws conforming to ASTM A307; fittings conforming to ASTM A575; parts enamel painted or electro-galvanized.

2. Concrete Inserts: Malleable iron body, hot dipped galvanized finish. Lateral adjustment.

MSS Type 18.

D. Continuous Concrete Insert: Steel construction, minimum 12 gauge. Electrogalvanized finish.

Pipe clamps and insert nuts to match.

E. Pipe Hangers:

1. Pipe Rings for Hanger Rods:
a. Pipe Sizes 2-inches and Smaller: Adjustable swivel ring hanger, UL listed. Erico 100 or 101, Anvil Figures 69 or 104, or approved equivalent. b. Pipe Sizes 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Clevis type hangers with adjustable nuts on rod, UL listed. Anvil figure 260, Erico 400, or approved equivalent. c. Pipe hangers to have same finish as hanger rods.

F. Pipe Saddles and Shields:

1. Factory fabricated saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports for insulated piping.

2. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. 1/2 round, 18 gauge, minimum 12-inches in length (4-inch pipe and larger to be three times longer than pipe diameter).

G. Riser Clamps: Steel, UL listed. MSS Type 8. Erico 510 or 511. Copper coated; Erico 368.

H. Pipe Slides: Anvil, reinforced Teflon slide material (3/32-inch minimum thickness) bonded to steel; highly finished steel or stainless steel contact surfaces to resists corrosion; 60-80 PSI maximum active contact surface loading; steel parts 3/16-inch minimum thickness; attachment to pipe and framing by welding.

I. Pipe Guides:

1. Furnish and install pipe guides on continuous runs where pipe alignment must be maintained. Minimum two on each side of expansion joints, spaced per manufacturer's recommendations for pipe size. Fasten guides securely to pipe and structure. Contact October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 536
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING,
DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29-4
with chilled water pipe not to permit heat to be transferred in sufficient quantity to cause condensation on any surface.

2. Furnish and install guides approximately four pipe diameters (first guide) and 14 diameters (second guide) away from each end of expansion joints. Guides are not to be used as supports and are in addition to other pipe hangers and supports.

J. Pipe Roller Hangers: Adjustable roller hanger. Black steel yoke, cast iron roller. MSS Type 41.

K. Below Ground Pipe Supports:

1. Pipe Hangers All Sizes: Adjustable Clevis type, Federal Specification WW-H-171 (Type 1), UL listed, stainless steel Type 304. MSS Type 1. Erico 406.

2. Rod: 5/8-inch stainless steel Type 18-8.

3. Eyebolt: Stainless steel Type 18-8.

4. Nuts and Washers: Stainless steel Type 18-8.

L. Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts:

1. 100-PSI (690-kPa) minimum compressive strength calcium silicate insulation, encased in sheet metal shield or polyisocyanurate rigid foam exceeding the load bearing weight of the pipe at the hanger point with a PVC vapor barrier.

2. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier or polyisocyanurate rigid foam with a PVC vapor barrier.

3. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated ASTM C533, Type 1 calcium silicate or polyisocyanurate rigid foam with a PVC vapor barrier.

4. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.

5. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

6. Insert Length: Extend 2-inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

7. Thermal Hanger Shield Insulation Operating Temperature: Meet or exceed fluid temperature in pipe.

M. Freestanding Roof Supports: Polyethylene high-density UV resistant quick "pipe" block with foam pad.

2.3 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A. Beam Clamps:

1. MSS Type 19 and 23, wide throat, with retaining clip.

2. Universal Side Beam Clamp: MSS Type 20.

B. Powder-Actuated Drive Pin Fasteners: Powder actuated type, drive pin attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

C. Anchor Bolts:

1. Anchor supports to existing masonry, block and tile walls per anchoring system manufacturer's recommendations or as modified by project structural engineer. Inserttype attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Anchor Bolts (Cast-In-Place): Steel bolts, ASTM A307. Nuts to conform to ASTM A194.

Design values for shear and tension not more than 80 percent of the allowable listed loads.

3. Anchor (Expansion) Bolts: Carbon steel to ASTM A307; nut to conform to ASTM A194; drilled-in type. Design values for shear and tension not more than 80 percent of the allowable listed loads.

4. Anchor (Adhesive) Bolts: Consisting of two-part adhesive cartridge and zinc-plated Type A307 steel anchor bolt rod assembly with ASTM A194 nut.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 537
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING,
DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29-5

2.4 FLASHING
A. Steel Flashing: 26 gauge galvanized steel.

B. Safes: 8 mil thick neoprene.

C. Caps: Steel, 22 gauge minimum, 16 gauge at fire-resistant structures.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS METAL AND MATERIALS
A. General:

1. Provide miscellaneous supports and metal items, including materials, fabrication, fastenings and accessories required for finished installation, where indicated on drawings or otherwise not shown on drawings that are necessary for completion of the project.

Contractor is responsible for their design.

2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to size shapes and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.

C. Steel Pipe: Provide seamless steel pipe conforming to requirements of ASTM A53, Type S, Grade A, or Grade B. Weight and size required as specified.

D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of types as required for assembly and installation of fabricated items; surface-applied fasteners are specified elsewhere.

F. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide incidental accessory materials, tools, methods, and equipment required for fabrication.

G. Provide hot dipped galvanized components for items exposed to weather. Cold galvanize fieldwelded joints and components. Use materials compatible with system being supported (i.e. aluminum for aluminum ductwork, stainless steel for stainless steel ductwork).

H. Use straps, threshold rods and wire with sizes required by SMACNA to support ductwork.

I. Grout:

1. ASTM C1107, Grade B, factory mixed and packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

2. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications.

3. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and non gaseous.

4. Design Mix: 5000-PSI (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 538
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING,
DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29-6
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Verify building materials to have hangers and attachments affixed in accordance with hangers to be used. Provide supporting calculations.

B. Examine Drawings and coordinate for verification of exact locations of fire and smoke rated walls, partitions, floors and other assemblies. Indicate, by shading and labeling on Record Drawings such locations and label as "1-Hour Wall," "2-Hour Fire/Smoke Barrier," and the like.

Determine proper locations for piping penetrations. Set sleeves in place in new floors, walls or roofs prior to concrete pour or grouting.

C. Install hangers, supports, anchors and sleeves after required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Coordinate proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments.

D. Equipment Clearances: Do not route ductwork, equipment, or piping through electrical rooms, transformer vaults, elevator equipment rooms, IT rooms, MPOE rooms, or other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures and the like. Within equipment rooms, provide minimum 3-feet lateral clearance from all sides of electric switchgear panels. Do not route ductwork, equipment, or piping above any electric power or lighting panel, switchgear, or similar electric device. Coordinate with Electrical and coordinate exact ductwork, equipment or pipe routing to provide proper clearance with such items.

3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT A. Hang rectangular sheet-metal ducts with a cross sectional area of less than 7 SF with galvanized strips of No. 16 USS gauge steel 1-inch wide, and larger ducts with steel angles and adjustable hanger rods similar to piping hangers. Support at a maximum of 8-feet on center.

B. Support horizontal ducts within 24-inches of each elbow and within 48-inches of each branch intersection.

C. Design hangers and supports to allow for expansion and contraction.

D. Provide aluminum supports for aluminum ductwork.

E. Provide stainless steel supports for stainless steel ductwork.

F. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16-feet and at each floor.

G. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test) load.

H. Install flexible ductwork per the more stringent of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards or the following:

1. Support horizontal duct runs at not more than 4 feet intervals.

2. Support vertical risers at not more than 6 feet intervals.

3. Limit sag between support hangers to 1/2-inch per foot of spacing support.

4. Supports shall be rigid and shall be not less than 1.5-inches wide at point of contact with the duct surface.

5. Duct bends shall be not less than 1.5 duct diameter bend radius.

I. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 539
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING,
DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29-7
J. Floor supports in mechanical rooms to be elevated 1-inch above finish floor and void space filled with masonry grout.

K. Anchor ducts securely to building in such a manner as to prevent transmission of vibration to structure. Do not connect duct hanger straps directly to roof deck. Do not support ducts from other ducts, piping or equipment.

L. Attach strap hangers installed flush with end of sheet-metal duct run to duct with sheet-metal screws.

M. Construct exterior ductwork or ductwork which is otherwise exposed to weather watertight and slope 1/4-inch per foot to avoid standing water.

N. Exposed ductwork hung in clean areas such as sanitary areas, pharmaceutical areas, wash down areas or food process areas to be installed using double end, food grade trapeze hanger rods suitable for use with food grade strut.

O. Channel Support System Installation:

1. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems.

2. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

P. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

Q. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

R. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

S. Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. Provide grout under supports to bring piping, ductwork and equipment to proper level and elevations.

T. Prime paint ferrous nongalvanized hangers, accessories, and supplementary steel which are not factory painted.

U. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports; Horizontal and Vertical Piping, and Hanger Rod Attachments:

1. Factory fabricated horizontal piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, to suit piping systems and in accordance with manufacturer's published product information.

2. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service.

3. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping.

4. Pipe support spacing (pipe supported in ceiling or floor-supported) to meet latest applicable Code and manufacturer's requirements.

5. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for uninsulated copper piping systems.

V. Plumber's Tape not permitted as pipe hangers or pipe straps.

W. Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. For horizontally hung grooved-end piping, provide a minimum of 2 hangers per pipe section.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 540
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING,
DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29-8
X. Pipe Ring Diameters:

1. Uninsulated and Insulated Pipe, Except Where Oversized Pipe Rings are Specified: Ring inner diameter to suit pipe outer diameter.

2. Insulated Piping Where Oversized Pipe Rings are Specified and Vibration Isolating Sleeves: Ring inner diameter to suit outer diameter of insulation or sleeve.

Y. Oversize Pipe Rings: Provide oversize pipe rings of 2-inch and larger size.

Z. Pipe Support Brackets: Support pipe with pipe slides.

AA. Steel Backing in Walls: Provide steel backing in walls to support fixtures and piping hung from steel stud walls.

BB. Pipe Guides:

1. Install on continuous runs where pipe alignment must be maintained. Minimum two on each side of expansion joints, spaced per manufacturer's recommendations for pipe size.

Fasten guides to pipe structure. Contact with chilled water pipe does not permit heat to be transferred in sufficient quantity to cause condensation on any surface.

2. Install approximately four pipe diameters (first guide) and 14 diameters (second guide) away from each end of expansion joints. Do not use as supports. Provide in addition to other required pipe hangers and supports.

CC. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation:

1. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.

2. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

3. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.

Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

DD. Group parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze-type hangers.

Maximum spacings: MSS SP-58.

EE. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe.

FF. Do not support piping from other piping.

GG. Fire protection piping will be supported independently of other piping.

HH. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated.

II. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping" is not exceeded.

JJ. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

2. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 541
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING,
DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29-9

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

4. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields to span arc of 180 degrees.

5. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

6. Shield Dimensions for Pipe, not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN 90): 12-inches long and 0.048-inch thick. b. NPS 4 (DN100): 12-inches long and 0.06-inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN125 and DN150): 18-inches long and 0.06-inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN200 to DN350): 24-inches long and 0.075-inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN400 to DN600): 24-inches long and 0.105-inch thick.

7. Pipes NPS 8 (DN200) and Larger: Include wood inserts. a. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.

8. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

KK. Escutcheon Plates: Install around horizontal and vertical piping at visible penetrations through walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings, including penetrations through closets, through below ceiling corridor walls, and through equipment room walls and floors.

3.3 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A. Factory fabricated attachments complying with MSS SP-58, selected to suit building substructure conditions and in accordance manufacturer's published product information.

B. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods.

C. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-58.

D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel or wood. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.

E. Attachment to Wood Structure: Anvil side beam bracket Figure 202 for attachment to wooden beam or approved attachment for a wood structure.

F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.

Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 PSI is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top in inserts.

H. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Test powder-actuated insert attachments with a minimum load of 100 pounds.

I. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4-inches thick.

J. Bolting: Provide bored, drilled or reamed holes for bolting to miscellaneous structural metals, frames or for mounts or supports. Flame cut, punched or hand sawn holes will not be accepted.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 542
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING,
DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29-10
K. Anchor Bolts:

1. Install anchor bolts for mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as required. Tightly fit and clamp base-supported equipment anchor bolts at equipment support points. Provide locknuts where equipment, piping and ductwork are hung.

3.4 FLASHING
A. Flash and counterflash where piping, ductwork and equipment passes through weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Provide 12-inch minimum height curbs for roof-mounted mechanical equipment. Flash and counter flash with galvanized steel, soldered and waterproofed.

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS METAL AND MATERIALS
A. General: Verify dimensions prior to fabrication. Form metal items to accurate sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings and otherwise required for proper installation; make with lines straight and angles sharp, clean and true; drill, countersink, tap, and otherwise prepare items for connections with work of other trades, as required. Fabricate to detail of structural shapes, plates and bars; weld joints where practicable; provide bolts and other connection devices required. Include anchorages; clip angles, sleeves, anchor plates, and similar devices. Hot dipped galvanize after fabrication items installed in exterior locations. Set accurately in position as required and anchor securely to building construction. Construct items with joints formed for strength and rigidity, accurately machining for proper fit; where exposed to weather, form to exclude water.

B. Finishes:

1. Ferrous Metal: After fabrication, but before erection, clean surfaces by mechanical or chemical methods to remove rust, scale, oil, corrosion, or other substances detrimental to bonding of subsequently applied protective coatings. For metal items exposed to weather or moisture, galvanize in manner to obtain G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A123. Provide other non-galvanized ferrous metal with 1 coat of approved rust-resisting paint primer, in manner to obtain not less than 1.0 mil dry film thickness. Touch-up damaged areas in primer with same material, before installation. Apply zinc coatings and paint primers uniformly and smoothly; leave ready for finish painting as specified elsewhere.

2. Metal in Contact with Concrete, Masonry and Other Dissimilar Materials: Where metal items are to be erected in contact with dissimilar materials, provide contact surfaces with coating of an approved zinc-chromate primer in manner to obtain not less than 1.0 mil dry film thickness, in addition to other coatings specified in these specifications.

3. For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.

C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; including, threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 543
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING,
DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29-11
and other connectors as required. Avoid cutting concrete reinforcing when drilling for inserts.

Reference structural drawings and reinforcing shop drawings and determine locations of stirrups prior to drilling into concrete.

E. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items, which are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction.

F. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work.

G. Setting Loose Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.

H. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-off flush with edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout.

Use metallic non-shrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonmetallic non-shrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

J. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports.

K. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

L. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

M. Provide galvanized components for items exposed to weather.

3.6 FIRE RATED SUPPORTS
A. Provide fire rated support as required by Codes.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 544
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
EQUIPMENT 23 05 48-1
SECTION 23 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Vibration Isolation

2. Seismic Restraint Devices

3. Factory Finishes

4. Seismic-Bracing/Restraint Devices/Systems for Equipment, Piping and Ductwork B. General:

1. Vibration isolation for mechanical ductwork, piping and equipment.

2. Seismic restraint for mechanical ductwork, piping and equipment.

3. Seismic Certification for equipment, hangers and systems.

4. Special inspections for systems.

C. Scope of Work:

1. Vibration isolation and seismic restraint of new equipment and systems within project boundary defined in architectural drawings.

2. Vibration isolation and seismic restraint of new equipment and systems in existing buildings to points of connection with existing systems.

3. Seismic restraint of existing systems and equipment shown on Drawings, within project boundary defined in architectural drawings.

4. Provide supplementary structural steel for seismic restraint systems. No hanging from roof deck is permitted on this project, unless specifically allowed by Structural Engineer of Record in writing prior to bid.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Vibration Isolation:
a. Product Data: Provide catalog data indicating size, type, load and deflection of each isolator; and percent of vibration transmitted based on lowest disturbing frequency of equipment.
b. Shop Drawings: Showing complete details of construction for steel and concrete bases including:
1) Fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 545
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
EQUIPMENT 23 05 48-2
equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment and cantilever loads.
2) Equipment mounting holes.
3) Dimensions.
4) Size and location of concrete and steel bases and curbs. 5) Isolation selected for each support point.
6) Details of mounting brackets for isolator.
7) Weight distribution for each isolator.
8) Details of seismic snubbers.
9) Code number assigned to each isolator.
c. Design calculations: Provide calculations for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

3. Seismic Restraint:
a. Shop Drawings: Show compliance with requirements of Quality Assurance article of this Section. Shop drawings to be stamped by a professional Structural or Civil Engineer licensed in State of California.
b. Calculations: Submit seismic calculations indicating restraint loadings resulting from design seismic forces. Include anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter and depth of penetration of anchors. Calculations certified by professional Structural or Civil Engineer licensed in State of California.

4. Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of seismic restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter and depth of penetration of anchors.

5. Submittals for Interlocking Snubbers: Include load deflection curves up to 1/2-inch deflection in x, y and z planes.

6. Welding certificates.

7. Equipment Certification: Provide seismic certification for equipment as noted in Seismic Design Summary or schedules on Drawings.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Vibration Isolation:
a. Except for packaged equipment with integral isolators, single manufacturer selects and furnishes isolation required.
b. Deflections indicated on drawings are minimum actual static deflections for specific equipment supported.
c. Isolator Stability:
1) Size springs of sufficient diameter to maintain stability of equipment being supported. Spring diameters not less than 0.8 of compressed height at rated load.
2) Springs have minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of rated defection.
3) Springs support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
d. Maximum Allowable Vibration Levels: Peak vibration velocities not exceed 0.08 in/sec. Correct equipment operating at vibration velocities that exceed this criteria.

2. Seismic Restraint:
a. Code and Standard Requirements:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 546
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
EQUIPMENT 23 05 48-3
1) Seismic restraint of equipment, piping and ductwork to be in accordance with latest enacted version of ASCE 7-16.
b. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Structural documents.
c. Certification: See Seismic Design Table or schedules on Drawings for equipment, systems and seismic-restraint devices designated to have seismic certification/qualification. Horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis performed according to ASCE 7-16. Anchorage systems to bear anchorage preapproval number from an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing or calculations, if preapproved ratings are not available. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be sealed by qualified licensed professional engineer in State of California. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads and one test or analysis at 45 degrees to weakest mode.
d. Seismic restraint and anchorage of permanent equipment and associated systems listed below to building structure be designed to resist total design seismic force prescribed in local building code:
1) Floor- or roof-mounted equipment weighing 400 pounds or greater. 2) Suspended, wall-mounted or vibration isolated equipment weighing 20 pounds or greater.
3) In-line duct devices connected to ductwork weighing 75 pounds or greater. 4) Housekeeping slabs: provide reinforcement and anchorage to building structure.
e. Where required, seismic sway bracing of suspended duct and piping meet following:
1) Pipe and duct runs requiring seismic bracing have minimum of two traverse braces and one longitudinal brace. Longitudinal (or traverse) brace at 90 degree change in direction may act as traverse (or longitudinal) brace if located within 2-feet of change in direction.
2) Seismic bracing may not pass through seismic separation joint. Pipe or duct runs that pass through seismic separation joint must be restrained within 5- feet of both sides of separation.
3) Seismic brace assembly spacing not to exceed 40-feet transverse and 80- feet longitudinal.
f. Seismic restraints may be omitted from suspended piping and duct if following conditions are satisfied:
1) For piping or ducts supported by rod hangers 12-inches or less in length from top of duct to bottom of structural support. Top connections to structure have swivel joints, eye bolts, or vibration isolation hangers for entire length of system run.
2) Lateral motion of system will not cause damaging impact with surrounding systems or cause loss of system vertical support.
3) System must be welded steel pipe, brazed copper pipe, sheet metal duct or similar ductile material with ductile connections.

C. Seismic restraints, including anchors to building structure, be designed by registered professional Structural or Civil Engineer licensed in State of California. Design includes:

1. Number, size, capacity and location of anchors for floor- or roof-mounted equipment. For curb-mounted equipment, provide design of attachment of both unit to curb and curb to structure.

2. Number, size, capacity and location of seismic restraint devices and anchors for vibration-isolation and suspended equipment. Provide calculations and test data verifying horizontal and vertical ratings of seismic restraint devices.

3. Number, size, capacity and location of braces and anchors for suspended piping and ductwork on as-built plan drawings.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 547
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
EQUIPMENT 23 05 48-4

4. Maximum seismic loads to be indicated on drawings at each brace location. Drawings bear stamp and signature of registered professional Structural or Civil Engineer who designed layout of braces.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Seismic Snubber Units: Furnish replacement neoprene inserts for snubbers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Vibration Isolation:

1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

2. Mason Industries, Inc.

3. M.W. Saussé - Vibrex

4. Where Mason numbers are specified, equivalent products by listed manufacturers are acceptable.

B. Seismic Restraint Devices:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.

2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

3. Mason Industries, Inc.

4. M.W. Saussé - Vibrex

5. Cooper B-Line Tolco

6. Unistrut Diversified Products Co.; Wayne Manufacturing Division.

7. Hilti, Inc.

C. Factory Finishes:

1. Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer Coating
D. Seismic-Bracing/Restraint Devices/Systems for Equipment, Piping and Ductwork:

1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

2. Mason Industries, Inc.

3. Hilti, Inc.

4. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

5. Unistrut

6. ISAT, Inc.

7. Where Mason numbers are specified, equivalent products by listed manufacturers are acceptable.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION
A. Type 4A - Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops (out of contact during normal operation) to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 548
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
EQUIPMENT 23 05 48-5
baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch thick, natural rubber or bridge bearing neoprene isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. Restraining bolts have large rubber grommets to provide cushioning in vertical and horizontal directions. A minimum clearance of 3/8-inch maintained around restraining bolts so as not to interfere with spring action.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.

4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.

6. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard bracket, utilize height saving brackets to accommodate height restrictions.

7. Mason Type: SLR.

B. Type 5C - Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomericinsert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 15 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment from vertical without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.

4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.

6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod.

8. Mason Type: RW30.

C. Type FC-1, Flexible Duct Connectors. See Specification Section 23 33 00, Air Duct Accessories.

D. Type FC-2B, Flexible Pipe Connector, Copper:

1. Inner Hose: Bronze, close pitch, annular corrugated hose.

2. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze (for piping over 2-inches, to be 3 pound braided stainless steel).

3. Minimum Allowable Pressure Rating: 125 PSI at 70 degrees F.

4. Joint: Sweat ends.

5. Size: Use pipe sized units.

6. Minimum Allowable Offset: 3/8-inch on each side of installed center line.

7. Basis of Design: Metraflex Model BBS.

E. Type FC-2C, Flexible Pipe Connector, Gas:

1. Inner Hose: 304 stainless steel.

2. Exterior Sleeve: Braided, 304 stainless steel.

3. Minimum Allowable Pressure Rating: 150 PSI at 70 degrees F up to 4-inch pipe.

4. Joint: Threaded carbon steel.

5. Minimum Allowable Offset: 3/4-inch on each side of installed center line.

6. Basis of Design: Metraflex GASCT.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 549
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
EQUIPMENT 23 05 48-6

2.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 50, plus or minus 5, with a flat washer face.

B. Seismic Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. Snubber load rating to match equipment size. Mason Type: Z-1011 or Z-1225.

1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete be seismic-rated, drill-in and stud-wedge or femalewedge type.

2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 50, plus or minus 5.

C. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable engagement. Mason Type: SCB.

D. Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. Units mounted outdoors exposed to weather: Epoxy powder coated, with 1000 hour salt spray rating per ASTM B-117. For high levels of corrosion protection utilize:

1. Conform to AAMA 605.2.

2. Apply coating following cleaning and pretreatment.

3. Cleaning: AA-C12C42R1X.

4. Dry system before final finish application.

5. Total Dry Film Thickness: Approximately 1.2 mils, when baked at 450 degrees F for 10 minutes.

B. Finish:

1. Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and factory-tested equipment before shipping.

2. Powder coating on springs and housings.

3. Hardware be electrogalvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.

4. Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use.

5. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate capacity range.

2.5 SEISMIC-BRACING/RESTRAINT DEVICES/SYSTEMS FOR EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND

DUCTWORK
A. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features and applications to be as defined in reports by agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear and pullout force of components be at least four times maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete to be seismic-rated, drill-in and stud-wedge or femalewedge type.

D. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 550
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
EQUIPMENT 23 05 48-7
E. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap and minimum 1/4-inch thick resilient cushion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide mounts for equipment installed outdoors for wind loads of 30 lbs. psf applied to any exposed surface of isolated equipment.

B. Do not install equipment or pipe which makes rigid contact with building slabs, beams, studs, walls, etc.

C. Anchor baseplate to floor or structure. Provide rubber grommets and washers to isolate bolt from base plate. Under no circumstances is isolation efficiency to be destroyed when bolting isolators to floor.

D. Building Penetrations: Isolate water piping and ductwork penetrating wall, ceilings, floors or shafts from structure by piping isolator or by 3/8-inch thick foamed rubber insulation. Install units flush with finished structure face, using one for each side as required. Cut units to length if longer than structure thickness. Caulk around pipe or duct at equipment room wall.

E. Provide roof curbs, equipment supports and roof penetrations. Work to maintain roof warranty.

Coordinate location, size, structural connections/requirements and flashing prior to installation.

F. Vibration isolators must not cause change of position of equipment or piping which would stress piping connections or misalignment shafts or bearings. Isolated equipment is to be level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts and pipes.

G. Pipe Hangers in Equipment Rooms: Support water and gas piping connected to rotating equipment within equipment rooms on spring and neoprene hangers. The first three hangers from a piece of vibrating equipment are to have a minimum of 1/2 static deflection of equipment isolators. Other isolators should have a minimum of 1/4 static deflection of equipment isolators.

H. Examination:

1. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

2. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

I. Testing: Perform following field quality-control testing:

1. Isolator seismic-restraint clearance.

2. Isolator deflection.

3. Snubber minimum clearances.

J. Adjusting:

1. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

2. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to resist seismic forces.

K. Cleaning: After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 551
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
EQUIPMENT 23 05 48-8
L. Demonstration: Engage factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain air-mounting systems. Reference Division 01, General Requirements.

3.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION
A. Reference General Installation Requirements above.

B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Vibration isolators must be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and certified submittal data.

D. Install isolation as indicated on Drawings by type and location and where indicated below.

E. Equipment Vibration Isolation Schedule:

Equipment Size Vibration Isolator Type
Minimum
Deflection
(in)
Fan-Powered Terminal Units All Type 5C, FC-1,2 0.75
Utility Set Centrifugal Fans All 4A 1.5
F. Isolation Mounts:

1. Install minimum of four seismic snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.

3. Provide flexible piping connection and flexible ductwork connection to equipment with isolation mounts or bases.

G. Isolating Hangers:

1. Support piping and ductwork connected to isolated equipment within equipment rooms on isolating hangers as scheduled on drawings. Unless otherwise noted, first three hangers from isolated equipment to have a minimum of 1/2 static deflection of equipment isolators. Other isolating hangers to have a minimum of 1/4 static deflection of equipment isolators.

2. Position isolating hanger elements as high as possible in hanger rod assembly, but not in contact with building structure. Install hangers so that hanger housing may rotate full 360 degrees about rod axis without contacting any object.

3. Unless otherwise noted, air supply units with internally isolated fans do not require isolating hangers for connecting pipes and ductwork.

4. Where parallel running pipes are hung together on an isolated trapeze, provide isolator deflections for largest determined by provisions for pipe isolation. Do not mix isolated and non-isolated pipes in same trapeze.

5. Install limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

H. Adjusting:

1. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.

2. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

3. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 552
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
EQUIPMENT 23 05 48-9

3.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Reference General Installation Requirements above.

B. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and certified submittal data.

C. Install and adjust seismic restraints so equipment, piping and ductwork supports are not degraded by restraints.

D. Restraints must not short circuit vibration isolation systems or transmit objectionable vibration or noise.

E. Install restraining cables at each trapeze, individual pipe hanger and hanging vibration isolated equipment. Provide restraining cables in each of the four directions of movement. Install restraining cables no less than 45 degrees from vertical. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

F. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods.

3.4 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Reference General Installation Requirements above.

B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Finishes to be factory-applied. No field patching or holidays allowed.

3.5 SEISMIC-BRACING/RESTRAINT DEVICES/SYSTEMS FOR EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND

DUCTWORK
A. Reference General Installation Requirements above.

B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 553
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND
EQUIPMENT 23 05 53-1
SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Plastic Nameplates

2. Tags

3. Plastic Pipe Markers

4. Ceiling Tags

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Schedules:
a. Submit valve schedule for each piping system, in tabular format using Microsoft Word or Excel software. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses by special "flags" in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for maintenance manuals. b. For renovations or expansions of existing systems, coordinate with Owner and develop valve schedule on existing schedule naming and format.

2. Submit schedule of identification type, including material, for each class of tagged item.

3. Submit locations at which Valve Schedules will be installed.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification devices of types and sizes required.

2. Codes and Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices unless otherwise indicated.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 554
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND
EQUIPMENT 23 05 53-2

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC NAMEPLATES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation

2. Brimar

3. Champion America

4. Craftmark

5. Seton
B. Description: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate in the size and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color), punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. Provide 1/8-inch thick material.

1. Letter Color: White.

2. Letter Height: 1/2-inch.

3. Background Color: Black.

4. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

2.2 TAGS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation

2. Brimar

3. Champion America

4. Craftmark

5. Seton
B. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 2-inch diameter.

C. Metal Tags: Polished Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 2-inch diameter with smooth edges.

D. Valve designations to be coordinated with existing valve identifications to ensure no repetitive designations are utilized.

E. Chart/Schedules: Valve Schedule Frames. For each page of a valve schedule, provide glazed display frame with removable mounting as appropriate for wall construction upon which frame is to be mounted. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass.

F. Valve Tag Fasteners: Solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 555
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND
EQUIPMENT 23 05 53-3
G. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7-inches.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE.

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

2.3 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation

2. Brimar

3. Champion America

4. Craftmark

5. Seton
B. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1 and ANSI Z535.1.

C. Plastic Pipe Markers (for external diameters of 6-inches and larger including insulation): Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.

D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers (for external diameters less than 6-inches including insulation):

Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

Minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.

E. Lettering:

1. 3/4-inch to 1-1/4-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8-inch long color field, 1/2- inch high letters.

2. 1-1/2-inch to 2-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8-inch long color field, 3/4- inch high letters.

3. 2-1/2-inch to 6-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12-inch long color field, 1-1/4- inch high letters.

4. 8-inch to 10-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 24-inch long color field, 2-1/2- inch high letters.

5. Over 10-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 32-inch long color field, 3-1/2-inch high letters.

2.4 CEILING TAGS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation

2. Brimar

3. Champion America

4. Craftmark

5. Seton
B. Description: Steel with 3/4-inch diameter color coded head.

C. Color code as follows:

1. Yellow - HVAC equipment.

2. Red - Fire dampers/smoke dampers.

3. Blue - Heating/cooling valves.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 556
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND
EQUIPMENT 23 05 53-4

4. Ceiling tile labels, machine generated, adhesive backed tape labels with black letters, clear tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers.

B. Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.

C. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples:

Chiller No. 3, Air Handling Unit No. 42, Standpipe F12, and the like).

D. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

E. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

F. Coordinate with the facility maintenance personnel to ensure consistency with the existing tagging system.

G. Install all products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Manual Balancing Dampers: Provide 12-inch long orange marker ribbon to end of balancing damper handle.

3.2 PLASTIC NAMEPLATES
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners.

B. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates riveted to equipment body.

C. Identify thermostats with nameplates.

3.3 TAGS
A. Use metal tags on piping 3/4-inch diameter and smaller.

B. Tag balancing valves and major dampers with balanced GPM or CFM indicated after balancing is completed and accepted.

C. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

D. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 557
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND
EQUIPMENT 23 05 53-5
E. Identify valves with metal tags. Indicate valve function and the normally open or closed positions on the valve tag.

F. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered plastic tags.

G. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.

H. Install valve schedule at each mechanical room.

3.4 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS
A. Install plastic pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.

Locate identification not to exceed 20-feet (reduced to 10-feet in congested areas and mechanical equipment rooms) on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

Locate near branches, valves, control devices, equipment connections, access doors, floor/wall penetrations.

3.5 CEILING TAGS
A. Provide ceiling tags to locate valves, dampers, and equipment above accessible ceilings.

Locate in corner of ceiling tee grid closest to equipment.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 558
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-1
SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. General Requirements and Procedures

2. Pre-Construction Balance (Existing Systems)

3. Ductwork Pressure Testing

4. Fundamental Air Systems Balancing Procedures

5. Temperature Control Verification

6. Constant Volume Air Systems Balancing Procedures

7. Variable Air Volume Systems Additional Procedures

8. Pre-Balance Reporting

9. Final Reports:
a. Report Requirements
b. General Report Data
c. System Diagrams
d. Air Handling Units
e. Fans
f. Duct Traverses
g. Diffusers/Registers/Grilles
h. Instrument Calibration

10. Additional Tests

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Submit two copies of evidence that the Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Agent and Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article below.

2. Pre-Construction Phase Report:
a. Provide a pre-construction phase TAB Plan at least two weeks prior to the commencement of TAB work. This report is to include:
1) A complete set of report forms intended for use on the Project, with data filled in except for the field readings. Forms to be Project-specific. 2) Marked up shop drawings identifying all HVAC equipment to be balanced, and associated outlets and terminal devices.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 559
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-2
3) Identification of the type, manufacturer, and model of the actual instruments to be used, and clear indication of which instrument will be used to take each type of reading. Calibration certifications to be included. 4) A narrative of Project-specific and/or non-standard TAB procedures to be used, and the equipment or systems to which they apply.

3. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit two copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

4. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Submit two copies of the TAB strategies and step-bystep procedures as specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

5. Specify reports required because of editing procedures in Part 3 of this Section.

6. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the TAB Agent.

7. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.

8. Test Instrument Calibration: Submit proof of calibration within the last 6 months.

9. Final Report.

10. Provide additional submittals to commissioning authority as dictated in Commissioning Specifications.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Acceptable TAB Agencies:
a. Northern California:
1) RSAnalysis, Inc.
2) National Air Balance Company (NABCO)
3) Mesa 3

2. Balance Firm Qualifications:
a. General:
1) Procure services of independent TAB agency to balance, adjust and test water circulating and air moving equipment and air distribution or exhaust systems. Minimum experience: 5 years.
2) Provide proof of testing agency having successfully completed at least five projects of similar size and scope.
b. Testing and Balancing firm is certified by AABC and has an AABC Test and Balancer Engineer (TBE) on staff.
c. Industry Standards: Testing and Balancing will conform to AABC, and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) as follows:
1) AABC: Comply with National Standards for Total System Balance. 2) ANSI:
(a) S1.4 Specifications for sound level meters.
(b) S1.11 Specifications for Octave-Band and Fractional-Octave-Band analog and digital filters.
(c) ANSI S1.13 Methods for the Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels. d. Test Observation: If requested, conduct tests in the presence of the Commissioning Authority, AHJ, Architect or the Architect's representative.

3. Code Compliance: Perform tests in the presence of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) where required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

4. Owner Witness: Perform tests in the presence of the Commissioning Authority, Architect, Architect's Representative, or Owner's representative.

5. Engineer Witness: The engineer or engineer's representative reserves the right to observe tests or selected tests to assure compliance with the specifications.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 560
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-3

6. Simultaneous Testing: Test observations by the AHJ, the Owner's Authorized Representative and the engineer's representative need not occur simultaneously.

7. Do not perform TAB work until heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment has been completely installed and is operating continuously as required.

8. Conduct air testing and balancing with clean filters in place. Clean strainers prior to performing hydronic testing and balancing.

9. TAB Conference: Meet with the Commissioning Authority, Owner's and the Architect's representatives on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
a. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
1) Submittal distribution requirements.
2) Contract Documents examination report.
3) TAB plan.
4) Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
5) Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. 6) Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

10. Certification of TAB Reports: This certification includes the following:
a. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.
b. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

11. TAB Reports: Use standard forms from AABC.

12. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC.

13. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. TAB Agency provides warranty for a period of 90 days following submission of completed report, during which time, Owner may request a recheck of up to 10 percent of total number of terminals, or resetting of outlet, coil, or device listed in the final TAB report.

2. Guarantee: Meet the requirements of the following programs:
a. Provide a guarantee on AABC forms stating that the agency will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the TAB Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:
1) The certified Agent has tested, adjusted, and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.
2) Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.

1.7 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 561
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-4
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.

E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.

H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

J. TAB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

K. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system.

L. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.

M. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the TAB procedures.

N. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

O. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.

P. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.

Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide 7 days advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C. Witness leakage and pressure tests carried out by Section 23 31 00, HVAC Ducts and Casings.

D. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 562
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES
A. Project Conditions:

1. Non-Owner Occupancy: Complete balancing of building systems prior to Substantial Completion and owner occupancy.

B. General Requirements:

1. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and controls, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Perform TAB work with doors, closed windows, and ceilings installed etc., to obtain simulated or project operating conditions. Do not proceed until systems scheduled for TAB are clean and free from debris, dirt and discarded building materials.

3. Where Owner occupies building during the testing period, cooperate with Owner to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

C. Examination:

1. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and existing building record documents (if available) to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
a. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.
b. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

2. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

3. Examine Project record documents described in Division 01, General Requirements.

4. Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including Basis of Design, HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

5. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

6. Coordinate requirements in system and equipment with this Section.

7. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed.

8. Examine system and equipment test reports.

9. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 563
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-6

10. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

11. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

12. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.

D. Preparation:

1. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

2. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
a. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
b. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. c. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. d. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. e. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
f. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. g. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided.
h. Windows, doors and other portions of the building envelope can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met.

3. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work. a. Attendance is required by installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or balanced.

4. Provide instruments required for TAB operations. Make instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing.

E. General TAB Procedures:

1. Perform TAB procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC and this Section.

2. Coordinate location of test probes prior to start of TAB procedures and make test probes available for Owner's tests after start of occupancy. Where required, cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.

Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.

3. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

F. Adjustment Tolerances:

1. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 5 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

3. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design at coils and plus or minus 5 percent at system pumps and equipment.

4. Adjust supply, return, and exhaust air quantities to maintain pressurization in spaces indicated on Drawings. Note and document room-to-room pressurization and maintain these relationships. Adjust pressure controlled spaces to within plus or minus 0.01 in WC.

G. Recording and Adjusting:

1. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including:
a. Running log of events and issues.
b. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others. c. Contract interpretation requests.
d. Lists of completed tests.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 564
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-7

2. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

3. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

4. Mark on drawings locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference location in final report.

5. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.

6. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

7. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by Owner's Authorized Representative, or Commissioning Agent.

3.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION BALANCE (EXISTING SYSTEMS)
A. Pre-Construction Balance - Air Systems

1. Prior to start of construction or demolition; read and record airflow to establish “as-found” conditions. Provide pitot traverse of supply, return and exhaust ductwork at locations indicated on drawings and, as minimum, at central air handlers, main branch ductwork and at each floor.

2. Read and record static pressure conditions across existing filters, coils and fans.

3. Read and record amp draw and motor data from each existing air handler and fan that will be modified during Project.

B. Pre-Construction Balance - Hydronic Systems

1. Prior to start of construction or demolition; read and record flow of hydronic systems to establish "as-found" conditions.

2. Read and record head loss and flow at existing coils, heat exchangers, air control devices, and pumps.

3. Read and record amp draw and motor data from each existing pump.

C. Pre-Construction Balance - Plumbing

1. Prior to start of construction or demolition; read and record flow of existing plumbing hot water heaters, hot water recirculation pump and recirculation branch lines.

2. Read and record name plate data for existing water heaters, domestic hot water heat exchangers, and hot water recirculation pump.

D. Report data and observations to Architect.

3.3 DUCTWORK PRESSURE TESTING
A. Test ductwork prior to connection to fan equipment. Repair leaks and retest until stipulated results are achieved.

B. Provide air pressure testing of ductwork as noted below for various project types and systems:

1. Supply and return ductwork located inside shafts and outside building envelope.

2. Exhaust ductwork located inside shafts.

3. Exhaust ductwork located outside building envelope, when used in a heat recovery system.

4. Exhaust systems serving compounding pharmacies, laboratories, laboratory support spaces, fume hoods, bio-safety cabinets, or hazardous exhausts: pressure test all ductwork.

5. For other project types or systems: pressure test ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, of representative sections of installed ductwork totaling not less than the total installed duct areas noted below:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 565
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-8
a. For variable air volume supply, return, or exhaust air systems’ ductwork of higher than 2-inches pressure class: pressure test 40 percent of the total installed duct area.
b. For variable air volume supply, return, or exhaust air systems’ ductwork of 2- inches or less pressure class: pressure test ductwork connected to 10-percent of the total installed duct area of such ductwork, but not less than ductwork connected to two terminal units. Where the tested 10-percent fails to comply, then pressure test 40-percent of the total installed duct area. c. For constant air volume supply, return, or exhaust systems: pressure test 40- percent of the total installed duct area.

6. Where tests are required, provide separate tests for each of supply, return and exhaust air systems.

7. Where the tested 40-percent fails to comply with the requirements of this section, then pressure test 100-percent of the total installed duct area. Sections shall be selected by the building owner or the Architect and shall include sections of ductwork upstream and downstream of terminal units. Positive pressure leakage testing may be utilized for negative pressure ductwork.

8. Area requirement of 40-percent of the total installed duct area is inclusive of ductwork located in shafts or outside building envelope.

C. Test ductwork prior to connection to fan equipment. Repair leaks and retest until stipulated results are achieved. Pressure testing to meet the following leakage classifications below as a minimum (2012 SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Manual, Table 4-1):

1. Leakage class to be as defined below as a minimum.
a. Minimum Duct Leakage Classification
Duct Type Leakage Class
Metal (Flexible excluded)
Round and flat oval 3
Rectangular 6

2. Testing machine: Meet requirements of SMACNA standards. Pacific Air Products "PortO-Lab", Rolok, or United Sheet Metal.

3. Test supply systems prior to connecting terminal units.

4. Perform tests in presence of Owner's Authorized Representative. Give 48 hours advance notice before commencement of each test.

5. Test ductwork systems in sections as large as possible and record test results accordingly.

6. Leak test grease exhaust ductwork per requirements of latest edition of NFPA-96 and local Mechanical Code.

7. Coordinate testing with ceiling installation.
a. Provide sheet-metal plates and install between each duct test section (applies to main-to-main fittings, branch-to-branch fittings and main-to-branch fittings). At each plate location, fabricate joint with Ductmate. Insert 14 gauge sheet metal between Ductmate using a neoprene gasket on both sides of metal plate. b. Leave plates in place until isolated section has been tested and approved by Owner's Authorized Representative.
c. Once sections have passed test, remove plates and reattach Ductmate joints. After fan unit is running, test joint for leakage by using a mixture of soap and water. If noise or bubbling occurs, reseal joint. Owner's Authorized Representative to witness this procedure.

8. Test duct at 1.5 times the design air pressure, up to pressure class of the duct. Seal audible leaks.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 566
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-9

3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

B. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

C. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

D. Prepare test reports for both fans and inlets and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

E. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

F. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

G. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return-air and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

H. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

I. Verify that motor starters are equipped with thermal protection, sized for the connected load.

J. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

K. Check for airflow blockages.

L. Check for readily observable leaks in air-handling unit components and ductwork.

M. Use sheaves and pulleys to adjust the speed of belt drive fans to achieve design flow with motors running at 60 Hertz unless noted otherwise.

3.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.

2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.

3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.

4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.

5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, equipment, drafts, and cold walls.

6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.

7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.

8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.

9. Interlocked systems are operating.

10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.

B. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 567
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-10
C. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions.

D. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

E. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

F. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

G. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.

H. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

I. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

J. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.6 CONSTANT VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan manufacturer. Adjust fans to deliver design airflow at the lowest possible speed.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.

2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component under final balanced condition.

3. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.

4. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.

5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor loading greater than full load amps. Do not increase fan speed beyond fan class rating. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

6. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.

7. Calibrate airflow measuring stations.

3.7 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEMS ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Compensating for Diversity:

1. When the total airflow of terminal units is more than the fan design airflow volume, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the design airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

2. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air Volume Systems:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 568
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-11
a. After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1) Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return-air and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2) Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure to deliver design airflow at the terminal unit.
3) Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within 10 percent of design airflow. 4) Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use the terminal unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units. 5) Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow.
(a) If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6) Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the returnair ducts and inlets. 7) Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. Balance system to achieve the lowest required differential pressure for the system to minimize fan brake horsepower.
8) Balance terminal units in variable volume systems for maximum cooling, maximum heating, and minimum ventilation (demand based ventilation systems) airflow rates.
9) Record the final fan performance data.

3. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air Volume Systems with Diversity:
a. After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1) Set system at maximum design airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
2) Adjust supply fan to maximum design airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at maximum airflow.
3) Set terminal units being tested at full-airflow condition. 4) Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to design airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units.
5) Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
6) Measure static pressure duct system at the sensor.
7) Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the returnair ducts and inlets. 8) Measure supply return and outside airflows with dampers at full economizer position.

4. Additional Requirements: Provide all additional procedures to compensate for diversity as prescribed in AABC standards and/or ASHRAE standards.

5. Calibrate airflow measuring stations.

3.8 PRE-BALANCE REPORTING
A. Pre-Construction Phase Report:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 569
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-12

1. Provide a pre-construction phase TAB Plan at least 2 weeks prior to the commencement of TAB work. This report is to include:
a. A complete set of report forms intended for use on the Project, with all data filled in except for the field readings. Forms to be Project-specific. b. Marked up shop drawings identifying all HVAC equipment to be balanced, and associated outlets and terminal devices.
c. Identification of the type, manufacturer, and model of actual instruments to be used, and clear indication of which instrument will be used to take each type of reading. Calibration certifications are to be included. d. A narrative of Project-specific and/or non-standard TAB procedures to be used, and the equipment or systems they apply to.

B. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

C. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced.

3.9 FINAL REPORTS
A. Report Requirements:

1. General:
a. Computer generated in PDF format and tabulated, divided, and bookmarked into sections by tested and balanced systems.
b. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified TAB engineer.
1) Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
c. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
1) Pump curves
2) Fan Curves
3) Manufacturers Test Data
4) Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers 5) Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data
B. General Report Data:

1. In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable:
a. Title Page
b. Name and Address of TAB Agent
c. Project Name
d. Project Location
e. Architect's Name and Address
f. Engineer's Name and Address
g. Contractor's Name and Address
h. Report Date
i. Signature of TAB Agent who Certifies the Report
j. Summary of Contents, Including the Following:
1) Design versus Final Performance
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 570
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-13
2) Notable Characteristics of Systems
3) Description of System Operation Sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents
k. Nomenclature Sheets for Each Item of Equipment
l. Data for Terminal Units, including Manufacturer, Type Size, and Fittings m. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values.
n. Test Conditions for Fans and Pump Performance Forms, Including the Following:
1) Settings for Outside-, Return-, and Exhaust-Air Dampers 2) Conditions of Filters
3) Cooling Coil, Wet- and Dry-bulb Conditions
4) Face and Bypass Damper Settings at Coils
5) Fan Drive Settings, including Settings and Percentage of Maximum Pitch Diameter
6) Inlet Vane Settings for Variable-Air-Volume Systems
7) Settings for Supply-air, Static-pressure Controller
8) Other System Operating Conditions that affect Performance C. System Diagrams:

1. Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present with singleline diagrams and include the following:
a. Quantities of Outside, Supply, Return, and Exhaust Airflows b. Water and Steam Flow Rates
c. Duct, Outlet, and Inlet Sizes
d. Pipe and Valve Sizes and Locations
e. Terminal Units
f. Balancing Stations
D. Air Handling Units:

1. For air-handling units include the following:
a. Unit Data: Include the following:
1) Unit Identification
2) Location
3) Make and Type
4) Model Number and Unit Size
5) Manufacturer's Serial Number
6) Unit Arrangement and Class
7) Discharge Arrangement
8) Sheave Make, Size in inches, and Bore
9) Sheave Dimensions, Center-to-center and Amount of Adjustments in Inches 10) Number of Belts, Make, and Size
11) Number of Filters, Type, and Size
b. Motor Data: Include the following:
1) Make and Frame Type and Size
2) Horsepower and rpm
3) Volts, Phase, and Hertz
4) Full-load Amperage and Service Factor
5) Sheave Make, Size in Inches, and Bore
6) Sheave Dimensions, Center-to-center and Amount of Adjustments in Inches c. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
1) Total Airflow Rate in cfm (L/s)
2) Total System Static Pressure in Inches wg (Pa)
3) Fan rpm
4) Discharge Static Pressure in Inches wg (Pa)
5) Filter Static-pressure Differential in Inches wg (Pa) 6) Preheat Coil Static-pressure Differential in Inches wg (Pa) October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 571
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-14
7) Cooling Coil Static-pressure Differential in Inches wg (Pa) 8) Heating Coil Static-pressure Differential in Inches wg (Pa) 9) Outside Airflow in cfm (L/s)
10) Return Airflow in cfm (L/s)
11) Outside-air Damper Position
12) Return-air Damper Position
13) Vortex Damper Position
E. Fans:

1. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
a. Fan Data: Include the following:
1) System Identification
2) Location
3) Make and Type
4) Model Number and Size
5) Manufacturer's Serial Number
6) Arrangement and Class
7) Sheave Make, Size in Inches, and Bore
8) Sheave Dimensions, Center-to-center and Amount of Adjustments in Inches b. Motor Data: Include the following:
1) Make and Frame Type and Size
2) Horsepower and rpm
3) Volts, Phase, and Hertz
4) Full-load Amperage and Service Factor
5) Sheave Make, Size in Inches, and Bore
6) Sheave Dimensions, Center-to-center and Amount of Adjustments in Inches 7) Number of Belts, Make, and Size
c. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
1) Total Airflow Rate in cfm
2) Total System Static Pressure in Inches wg
3) Fan rpm
4) Discharge Static Pressure in Inches wg
5) Suction Static Pressure in Inches wg
F. Duct Traverses:

1. Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
a. Report Data: Include the following:
1) System and Air-handling Unit Number
2) Location and Zone
3) Duct Static Pressure in Inches wg
4) Duct Size in Inches
5) Duct Area in SF
6) Design Airflow Rate in cfm
7) Design Velocity in fpm
8) Actual Airflow Rate in cfm
9) Actual Average Velocity in fpm
G. Diffusers/Registers/Grilles:

1. For diffusers, registers and grilles, include the following:
a. Unit Data: Include the following:
1) System and Air-handling Unit Identification
2) Location and Zone
3) Test Apparatus Used
4) Area Served
5) Air-terminal-device Make
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 572
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-15
6) Air-terminal-device Number from System Diagram
7) Air-terminal-device Type and Model Number
8) Air-terminal-device Size
9) Air-terminal-device Effective Area in SF
b. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
1) Airflow Rate in cfm
2) Air Velocity in fpm
3) Final Airflow Rate in cfm
4) Final Velocity in fpm
5) Space Temperature in Degrees F
H. Instrument Calibration:

1. For instrument calibration, include the following:
a. Report Data: Include the following:
1) Instrument Type and Make
2) Serial Number
3) Application
4) Dates of Use
b. Dates of Calibration

3.10 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 573
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00-1
SECTION 23 07 00

HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Type A, Flexible Glass Wool Blanket

2. Type 1, Glass Wool Pipe Insulation

3. Jacketing

4. Accessories

5. Duct Insulation Accessories

6. Duct Insulation Compounds

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Piping and duct insulation products to contain less than 0.1 percent by weight PBDE in all insulating materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Installer qualifications.

2. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any) for each type of product indicated.
a. Where indicated R-values/ratings cannot be achieved by a single layer of insulation, describe how performance requirements will be achieved.

Include dates of tests.

4. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.

5. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Formaldehyde Free: Should be third-party certified with UL Environment Validation.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 574
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00-2

2. Recycled Content: A minimum of 40 percent post-consumer recycled glass content certified and UL validated.

4. Installer to have minimum 5 years' experience in the business of installing insulation.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. Test pipe insulation in accordance with the requirements of current edition of UL "Pipe and Equipment Coverings R5583 400 8.15."
C. Test duct insulation in accordance with current edition of ASTM E84, UL 723, NFPA 255, NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TYPE A, FLEXIBLE GLASS WOOL BLANKET
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Certainteed

2. Johns Manville

3. Knauf

4. Owens-Corning
B. ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B-2; flexible blanket.

C. 'K' Value: 0.27 BTU*in/(hr*sf*F) at 75 degrees F installed, maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.

D. Density: 0.75 pounds per cubic foot.

E. DBDE-free. UL/E validated to be formaldehyde-free.

F. Vapor Barrier Jacket: FSK aluminum foil reinforced with glass wool yarn and laminated to fire resistant Kraft, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape or outward clinched expanded staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed.

2.2 TYPE 1, GLASS WOOL PIPE INSULATION
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Certainteed

2. Johns Manville

3. Knauf

4. Owens-Corning
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 575
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00-3
B. Glass Wool: ASTM C547 Type I and IV; rigid molded, noncombustible.

1. Thermal Conductivity Value: As indicated in the insulation tables below.

2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F to 1000 degrees F.

C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: White Kraft paper reinforced with glass wool and bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or vapor barrier mastic.

2.3 JACKETING
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. ITW Insulation Systems

2. General Insulation Company

3. Johns Manville

4. 3M

5. Or approved equivalent.

B. Insulation Jacketing Tape: 0.016-inch thick multi-layered laminate with minimum tensile strength of 149-lb/inch, minimum puncture resistance of 49 pounds per ASTM D1000, maximum emittance of 0.03 per ASTM C1371, maximum WVTR of 0.00 perm per ASTM E96, and min/max service temperature of -40 degrees F to 300 degrees F, as manufactured by 3M, VentureClad1579GCW-E.

C. PVC preformed molded insulation covers, for piping. Zeston or approved equivalent.

D. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016-inch-thick sheet, (smooth/embossed) finish, with longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch laps, die-shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.

E. Stainless Steel Jacket: Type 304 stainless steel, 0.010-inch, smooth finish.

F. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 ounce/sq.yd., plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. ITW Insulation Systems

2. Or approved equivalent.

B. Equipment Insulation Jacketing: Presized glass cloth, not less than 7.8 ounces/sq.yd., except as otherwise indicated. Coat with gypsum based cement.

C. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cement, sealers, mastics and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

D. General: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape corner angles, anchors, stud pins and metal covers as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

Accessories, i.e., adhesives, mastics, cements and tape to have the same flame and smoke component ratings as the insulation materials with which they are used. Shipping cartons to bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed those listed above. Provide permanent treatment of jackets or facings to impart flame and smoke safety. Provide non-watersoluble treatments. Provide UV protection recommended by manufacturer for outdoor installation.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 576
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00-4

2.5 DUCT INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Certainteed

2. Johns Manville

3. Owens-Corning
B. Staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

2.6 DUCT INSULATION COMPOUNDS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Certainteed

2. Johns Manville

3. Owens-Corning
B. Cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. Comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168 in accordance with LLE EQ 4.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Verification of Conditions:

1. Do not apply insulation until pressure testing and inspection of ducts and piping has been completed.

2. Examine areas and conditions under which duct and pipe insulation will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to be insulated.

C. Installation:

1. Insulation: Continuous through walls, floors and partitions except where noted otherwise.

D. Provide accessories as required. See Part 2 Article "Accessories" above.

E. Protection and Replacement: Installed insulation during construction. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.

F. Labeling and Marking: Provide labels, arrows and color on piping and ductwork. Attach labels and flow direction arrows to the jacketing per Section 23 05 53, Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment.

G. Ductwork:

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 577
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00-5

1. Install insulation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations to completely cover duct.

2. Butt insulation joints firmly together and install jackets and tapes smoothly and securely.

3. Apply duct insulation continuously through sleeves and prepared openings, except as otherwise specified. Apply vapor barrier materials to form complete unbroken vapor seal over insulation.

4. Coat staples and seals with vapor barrier coating.

5. Cover breaks in jacket materials with patches of same material as vapor barrier. Extend patches not less than 3-inches beyond break or penetration on all directions and secure with adhesive and staples. Seal staples and joints with vapor barrier coating.

6. Fill jacket penetrations, i.e., hangers, thermometers and damper operating rods, and other voids in insulation, with vapor barrier coating. Seal penetration with vapor barrier coating. Insulate hangers and supports for cold duct in un-conditioned spaces to extent to prevent condensation on surfaces.

7. Seal and flash insulation terminations and pin punctures with reinforced vapor barrier coating.

8. Continue insulation at fire dampers and fire/smoke dampers up to and including those portions of damper frame visible at outside of the rated fire barrier. Insulating terminations at fire dampers in accordance with this Section.

9. Do not conceal duct access doors with insulation. Install insulation terminations at access door in accordance with this Section.

H. Ductwork Surfaces to be Insulated: California
Item to be
Insulated
System Insulation
Type
Duct Size Insulation Thickness
Supply ductwork
where duct is not
specified to be
lined.

A All 1.5-inch
Return ductwork
where duct is not
specified to be
lined.
-- All None
Exhaust ducts
within 10-feet of
exterior
A All 3-inch

1. Note: Insulation thickness shown is a minimum. If state codes require additional thickness, then provide insulation thickness per code requirements.

I. Piping Surfaces to be Insulated:

Item to be
Insulated
System
Insulation
Type
Conductivity
Range (Btuinch per hour
per SF per
degrees F)
Pipe Size (Inches)
Insulation
Thickness
(Inches)
Heating,
Steam, and
Steam
Condensate
(141F to
200F)
1 0.25-0.29 at a
mean rating
temperature of
125 degrees F
<1
1 to <1.5

1.5 to <4
4 to <8
>= 8

1.5 1.5

2.0 2.0

2.0 October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 578
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00-6

1. Note: Insulation thickness shown is a minimum. If state code requires additional thickness, then provide insulation thickness per code requirements.

3.2 TYPE A, FLEXIBLE GLASS WOOL BLANKET
A. Install insulation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements.

B. Duct Wrap: Cover air ducts per insulation table except ducts internally lined where internal duct lining is adequate to achieve adequate insulating values to meet local Energy Codes (indicate on shop drawings, locations where duct wrap is planned to be omitted and indicate internal duct lining insulating values to confirm they will meet the Energy Code). Wrap tightly with circumferential joints butted and longitudinal joints overlapped minimum of 2-inches. On ducts over 24-inches wide, additionally secure insulation with suitable mechanical fasteners at 18- inches on center. Circumferential and longitudinal joints stapled with flare staples 6-inches on center and covered with 3-inch wide, foil reinforced tape.

3.3 TYPE 1, GLASS WOOL PIPE INSULATION
A. See General Installation Requirements above.

B. Install insulation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements.

C. Lap seal insulation with waterproof adhesive. Do not use staples or other methods of attachment which would penetrate vapor barrier. Apply fitting covers with seated tacks and vapor barrier tape.

3.4 JACKETING
A. See General Installation Requirements above.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Install insulation in conformance with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and requirements.

B. See General Installation Requirements above.

C. Furnish and install accessories for all insulation types listed in this Section.

3.6 DUCT INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Install insulation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 579
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00-7

3.7 DUCT INSULATION COMPOUNDS
A. Install insulation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 580
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-1
SECTION 23 09 00

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. The base building has an existing KMC Controls building automation system, provided and/or maintained by Comfort International, Inc.. Expand the existing building automation system to control new equipment associated with this project.

B. Work Included:

1. Communications

2. Operator Interface

3. Controller Software

4. Web Based Access

5. BAS Graphics

6. Application Specific Controller - Terminal Unit Controllers

7. Input/Output Interface

8. Power Supplies and Line Filtering

9. Control Panels

10. Auxiliary Control Devices

11. Wiring and Raceways

12. Smoke Detection for Projects with a Building Fire Alarm System C. This is a performance specification and Contractor is responsible for design tasks and engineering.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Current edition of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135 and addendum, BACnet.

2. Current edition of UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management Equipment, Canada and the US.

3. Current edition of FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A.

4. Current edition of BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL).

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Prepare and submit a detailed schedule of work. Schedule to identify milestones such as equipment submittals, control panel diagrams, color graphic panel displays, Interlock.

2. Wiring diagrams, control program sequence software flow chart diagrams, conduit layout diagrams, device location diagrams, equipment and component deliveries, installation October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 581
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-2
sequencing, controller startup, point to point startup, control programming, sequence testing, commissioning/acceptance testing and training.

3. Submit design drawings, sequences of operation, program listings, software flow charts and details for each typical piece of equipment and system being controlled. No work to be initiated or fabrication of any equipment started prior to the Owner's Authorized Representatives return of REVIEWED submittals.
a. Sequence of Operation: The sequence of operation included in the design documents is intended only to communicate the Engineers’ general control intent and is not to be used as a direct reference for programming of the EMS system.

Verbatim duplication of the Engineer’s Sequence of Operation on the submittals is discouraged and may result in non-approval of the submittal. Sequence of operation on submittals to accurately detail the system’s intended programming, and include details of enhancements, adjustments, or deviations from the Engineer’s sequence of operation. Submitted sequence of operation to be written with a logical and organized format and flow. Provide detailed, clear and unambiguous sequence of operation language. Point descriptors and point nomenclature referenced in the submitted sequence of operation to match those (to be) actually programmed. As-built submittal Sequence of Operation to include modifications to the programming made as a result of any addendum, bulletins, RFI’s, change orders, and commissioning.

4. Format: Make each submittal in one complete and contiguous package. Partial or unmarked submittals will be rejected without review.

5. Submit Manufacturers Data as Follows:
a. Complete materials list of items proposed to be furnished and installed. A complete Bill of Materials, listing materials, components, devices, wire and equipment are required for this work. The Bill of Materials to be separate for each controller on its own page(s) and to contain the following information for each item listed:
1) Manufacturer's Name and Model number with furnished options highlighted. 2) Quantity of each by controller location.
3) Description of product (generic).
4) Specified item.
5) Operating range or span.
6) Operating point or setpoint.
b. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required demonstrating compliance with the specified requirements, including but not limited to: Catalog cuts, technical data and descriptive literature on hardware, software, and system components to be furnished.
c. The data to be clearly marked and noted to identify specific ranges, model numbers, sizes, and other pertinent data. Submit printed manufacturer's technical product data for each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes of materials and including printed installation instructions and start-up instructions. d. Unless specifically called for otherwise, provide bound copies of catalog cuts for standard products, not requiring specifically prepared Shop Drawings, for the following:
1) Wire and Cable, Class II
2) Face Plates for Devices
3) Disconnect Switches for Power Control
e. Where more than one item, size, rating or other variations appear on a catalog cut sheet, clearly identify items to be provided. These items to be properly indexed and referenced to identification numbers, designations and/or details on the Drawings.

6. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each controlled system, depicting the following information:
a. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves and other control/monitoring devices.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 582
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-3
b. Label each control device with initial setting or adjustable range of control. Label points in schematic diagrams with termination at corresponding controller. c. Electrical Wiring: Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions of be field-installed.
d. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. e. Interfaces to equipment furnished under other Specification Sections identifying numbers of wires, termination location, voltages and pertinent details.

Responsibility for each end of the interfaces to be noted on these drawings whether or not they are a part of this Section.
f. System architecture diagram showing the global connectivity of new controllers and any existing systems that will be connected to.

7. Equipment locations, wiring and piping schematics, details, panel configurations, sizes, damper motor mounting details, valve schedules, and a points list keyed to specific hardware submittals. Control wiring depicted as fully annotated ladder diagrams with terminations identified, completely configured as to the exact panel, wiring, relay, switch, and component configuration.

8. Tag Number Lists: Develop instruments tag number system and submit list for approval.

Coordinate methods and number block with the Owner's Authorized Representative.

9. Format the Shop and Field Drawings to Include:
a. A Title Sheet containing a drawing list, abbreviations list, symbols list, site and vicinity maps for project location and schedules.
b. Floor Plans showing proposed device locations and device nomenclatures. c. A Riser Diagram illustrating conduit relationships between devices shown on the Floor Plans. Show device nomenclatures.
d. A Single-Line Diagram for each system showing signal relationships of devices within the system. Show device nomenclatures.
e. A Wiring Diagram for each assembly, enclosure or free standing device, showing:
1) The Devices Within
2) Wiring Connections
3) Wire Identification
4) Voltage Levels
5) Fuse Ratings
f. Operations and Maintenance Manuals:
1) Following approval of Shop Drawings of control equipment and prior to acceptance of control work, prepare Operating and Maintenance manuals describing operating, servicing, and maintenance requirements of control systems and equipment installed under this Section, in accordance with the General and Special Conditions of these Specifications. 2) Information contained in the manual for the above equipment to include the following:
(a) Manufacturer's catalog cuts and printed descriptive bulletins. (b) Manufacturer's installation, operating, and maintenance instruction booklets. Complete instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of equipment involved.
(c) Instrument calibration certificates.
(d) Parts list and costs.
(e) Complete nomenclature of replaceable parts, list of recommended spare parts for 12 months operation, their part numbers, current cost and name and address of the nearest vendor of replacement parts. (f) Name, address and telephone number for closest source of spare parts.
(g) Wiring and schematic diagrams.
(h) Include final record copies of shop drawings.
(i) Copy of guarantees and warranties issued for the various items of equipment, showing dates of expiration.
(j) Reduced plans, diagrams, and control schematics.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 583
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-4
(k) Copies of test results.
(l) Control System Operating Manual including: point of summary and point data base; complete printout of program listings; magnetic tape CD or DVD backup of Field Control Cabinet programs; cabinet layout; hard copy of graphic screens; hard copy of specified reports. g. A final Bill of Quantities including a separate schedule for portable equipment, if delivered as part of this work.
h. Performance, Test and Adjustment Data: Comprehensive documentation of performance verification according to parameters specified in these specifications. i. Record Drawings: Comply with Division 01, General Requirements and Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements. Provide complete as-built submittals including "as-programmed" sequence of operation as well as final occupancy schedules.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this Section with minimum five years' experience in the local area. Installers required to have successfully completed manufacturer's control system factory training.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Control system referenced throughout specifications and drawings as Building Automation System (BAS), Building Management System (BMS), or Energy Management System (EMS) interchangeably consists of high-speed, peer-to-peer network of DDC controllers, control system server, and operator workstation. System to be UUKL listed if used for smoke control.

B. The base building BAS is existing. Engage with the existing base building BAS contractor to provide the complete integration of new or altered controls, as described in the contract documents. Ensure that all new work emulates the existing operational controls and operator interfaces within the base building BAS, unless specifically noted otherwise in the contract documents. Provide and commission all materials, devices, and programming necessary for new controls to integrate with existing base building BAS. Ensure that all new materials and devices are fully compatible with existing base building BAS and of equal quality.

C. System software based on server/thin-client architecture, designed around open standards of web technology. Control system server accessed using a web browser over control system network, Owner's local area network, and remotely over Internet (through Owner's LAN). Intent of thin-client architecture is to provide operators complete access to control system via web browser. No special software other than web browser required to access graphics, point displays, and trends.

D. Local Area Network (LAN) either 10 or 100 Mpbs Ethernet network.

E. System will consist of open architecture that is capable of:

1. High speed Ethernet communication using TCP/IP protocol.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 584
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-5

2. Native BACnet communications according to ANSI / ASHRAE Standard 135, latest edition. Provide necessary BACnet-compliant hardware and software to meet the system's functional specifications. Controller devices must be BTL tested and listed by an official BACnet Testing Laboratory and have the BTL mark issued.

F. Complete temperature control system to be DDC with electronic sensors and electronic/electric actuation valves and dampers.

G. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, building riser/architecture diagram and sequence of control from the project design data. Any architecture diagrams on design drawings have been included as schematics only and are not meant to portray quantity of devices or power/data requirements.

H. Design, furnish, and install equipment cabinets, panels, data communication network infrastructure (including cables, conduits, outlets, connections, etc.) needed, and associated hardware.

I. Provide complete manufacturer's specifications for items that are supplied. Include vendor name and model number of every item supplied.

J. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described in these Specifications.

K. Provide as-built documentation, operator's terminal software, diagrams, and other associated project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on approved media, the sum total of which accurately represents the final system.

L. Provide 120V power, low voltage power, transformers, etc. for control panels, transformer panels, and BAS devices. Install per Division 26, Electrical Specifications. Power for devices within this Specification Section is solely the responsibility of the BAS Contractor.

M. Conduit and raceway systems. Provide per Division 26, Electrical Specifications.

N. Devices, components, controllers, and software to be manufacturer's most current version at the time of installation.

1.8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Performance Standards - System conforms to following minimum standards over network connections:

1. Graphic Display: Graphic with 20 dynamic points display with current data within 10 seconds.

2. Graphic Refresh: Graphic with 20 dynamic points update with current data within 8 seconds.

3. Object Command: Devices react to command of binary object within 2 seconds. Devices begin reacting to command of analog object within 2 seconds.

4. Object Scan: Data used or displayed at controller or workstation have been current within previous 6 seconds.

5. Alarm Response Time: Object that goes into alarm is annunciated at workstation within 45 seconds.

6. Program Execution Frequency: Custom and standard applications are capable of running as often as once every 5 seconds. Select execution times consistent with mechanical process under control.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 585
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-6

7. Performance: Programmable controllers are able to completely execute DDC PID control loops at frequency adjustable down to once per second. Select execution times consistent with mechanical process under control.

8. Multiple Alarm Annunciation: Each workstation on network receive alarms within 5 seconds of other workstations.

B. Reporting Accuracy: System reports values with minimum end-to-end accuracy listed in Reporting Accuracy Table below.

1. Reporting Accuracy Table:

Measure Variable Reported Accuracy
Space Temperature Plus or Minus 1 degree F
Ducted Air Plus or Minus 1 degrees F
Water Temperature Plus or Minus 1 degree F
Delta-T Plus or Minus 0.25 degree F
Water Flow Plus or Minus 2 percent of full scale

2. Note 1: Accuracy applies to 10 percent-100 percent of scale

3. Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure

4. Note 3: Not including utility-supplied meters
C. Control Stability and Accuracy. Control loops maintain measured variable at setpoint within tolerances listed in Control Stability and Accuracy Table below.

1. Control Stability and Accuracy Table:

Controlled Variable Control Accuracy Range of Medium
Air Pressure Plus or minus 0.2 inch
wg
0-6 inch wg
Plus or minus 0.01 inch
wg
-0.1 to 0.1 inch wg
Airflow Plus or minus 10
percent of full scale
Space Temperature Plus or minus 2.00
degrees F
Duct Temperature Plus or minus 3.0
degrees F
Fluid Pressure Plus or minus 1.5 PSI 1-150 PSI
Plus or minus 1.0 inch
wg
0-50 inch wg differential
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NORTHERN CALIFORNIA MANUFACTURERS
A. KMC Controls
B. Duct/Spot-Type Smoke Detectors (Project with Fire Alarm System):

1. See Division 28 for Products.

2.2 COMMUNICATIONS
A. Each controller to have communication port for connection to operator interface.

1. Internetwork operator interface and value passing to be transparent to internetwork architecture.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 586
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-7

2. Operator interface connected to controller to allow operator to interface with each internetwork controller as if directly connected. Controller information such as data, status, reports, system software, and custom programs to be viewable and editable from each internetwork controller.

B. Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate control strategies across multiple controllers to be readable by each controller on internetwork.

C. Operator Workstation to be capable of simultaneous direct connection and communication with BACnet/IP, OPC and TCP/IP networks without use of interposing devices such as PC or gateway with hard drive.

D. Workstations, Building Control Panels and Controllers with real-time clocks use time synchronization service. System automatically synchronizes system clocks daily from operatordesignated device via internetwork. System automatically adjusts for daylight saving and standard time as applicable.

E. Wireless Network Communications:

1. Wireless communications take place using modular wireless transceivers at each device, which eliminates need for communication cabling.

2. Wireless transceiver utilizes 2.4 GHz in license free global Industrial Scientific and Medical (ISM) band.

3. Wireless transceiver is encased in plenum-rated enclosure. If application dictates, wireless transceiver is able to be installed in metal enclosure utilizing remote mounted antenna.

4. Wireless transceiver channel is factory set and capable of being field set to different channel if interference with IEEE 802.11 devices or other 2.4 GHz products is encountered.

5. Wireless transceiver is 24 VAC powered.

6. Wireless transceiver gives a visual indication that it is powered and communicating.

7. Wireless transceiver has a field-settable network identifier that allows multiple networks to occupy same channel for maximum scalability.

2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. Operator Interface: PC-based workstations reside on high-speed network with building controllers. Each workstation or each standard browser connected to server is able to access system information.

B. Hardware: Each operator workstation or web server consists of the following:

1. Computer: Hardware meets or exceeds DDC system manufacturer's recommended specifications and meet response times specified elsewhere in this document. Following hardware requirements also apply:
a. Hard disk have sufficient memory to store:
1) Required operator workstation software.
2) One year of trend data based on points specified to be trended at specified trend intervals.
b. Minimum hardware configuration includes:
1) Intel i7 Processor
2) 22-in LCD Monitor with at least 1024 x 768 Resolution 3) 8 GB of RAM
4) 48x CD-RW/DVD Optical Drive
5) 1 TB Hard Disk Drive Providing Data at 3 GB/sec
6) Ethernet 10/100 Network Interface Card
7) High Performance Graphics Card
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 587
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-8
8) Keyboard and Mouse
9) Color Inkjet Printer
10) UPS (uninterruptible power supply) installed at server, sized with sufficient capacity to allow full operation for 10 minutes or more.

C. System Software:

1. Operating System: Furnish concurrent multi-tasking operating system. Operating system also supports use of and includes other common software applications such as Microsoft Excel, Word, Microsoft Access and Adobe Acrobat. Acceptable operating systems are Windows 10 and Windows 11.

2. Dynamic Color Graphics:
a. Real-time color graphic displays dynamic and able to update displays. b. Provide operator ability to change values (setpoints) and states in system controlled equipment directly from graphic display.
c. Custom Graphics. Provide custom graphics generation package. d. Graphics Library. Furnish library of standard HVAC equipment graphics and include standard symbols for fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers, and ductwork.

3. Software to be manufacturer's most current version at the time of installation.

D. System Applications: Each workstation provides operator interface and offline storage of system information. Provide following applications at each workstation:

1. Automatic System Database Save and Restore: Each workstation stores on hard disk copy of current database of each Building Controller. This database automatically updated whenever change is made in any system panel.

2. Manual Database Save and Restore: System operator able to manually save or clear database and initiate download of specified database from/to any panel.

3. System Configuration: Workstation software provides method of configuring system to allow for changes or additions by users and performs following tasks:
a. Create, delete or modify control strategies.
b. Add/delete objects to system.
c. Tune control loops through adjustment of control loop parameters. d. Enable or disable control strategies.
e. Generate hard copy records of control strategies on printer. f. Select points to be alarmed and define alarm state.
g. Select points to be trended and initiate automatic recording of values. h. Start/Stop binary objects and adjust analog objects.

4. Security: Operator required to log on to system with user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security selectable for each operator.

5. System Diagnostics: System automatically monitor operation of workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. Failure of any device to be annunciated.

6. Alarm Indication and Handling:
a. Workstation provides visual means of alarm indication. Alarm indication becomes highest priority regardless of application(s) running.
b. System provides and archive log of alarm messages to hard drive. Alarm messages to include description of event-initiating object, source, location and time/date of alarm.

7. Trend Logs: Operator able to define custom trend log for any data object and include interval, start time, and stop time. Trend data sampled and stored on building controller panel, is archived on hard disk, and is retrievable for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs.
a. System server to periodically gather historically recorded data stored in the building controllers and archive the information. Archived files to be appended with new sample data, allowing samples to be accumulated.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 588
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-9
b. Software to be included that is capable of graphing the trend logged object data.

Software capable of creating two-axis (x,y) graphs that display object values relative to time.
c. Operator able to change trend log setup information. This includes the information to be logged as well as the interval at which it is to be logged. Input, output, and value object types in the system may be logged. Provide operations password protected. Setup and viewing may be accessed directly from any graphics on which object is displayed.
d. BAS Contractor to enable trending for any system points (physical or virtual) as directed by the Engineer, Owner or Cx Authority (Commissioning Authority). There will be no limit on the number of trended points the BAS Contractor is to set up.

BAS Contractor will modify trend setup parameters as directed by the Commissioning Authority during testing. BAS Contractor to be proactive and enable trending for major system points during system startup/programming. BAS Contractor is not to wait for direction to begin trending points. Trend data for each point to be archived on the main server for a minimum of one year. Trend data archiving to be enabled immediately upon trend setup, or as soon as communication between the field panel and sever is established. Trend data uploads from field panel to server set up to be automatically performed with sufficient frequency to ensure no data gaps or loss of trend data. e. Trend points as identified in the points list. Provide system specific trend data in two-axis (x,y) graphs that display object values relative to time to Engineer, Owner, or Commissioning Authority.

8. Standard Reports: Standard system reports provided for this project. Provide ability for Owner to readily customize these reports for this project:
a. Objects: System (or subsystem) objects and their current values. b. Logs:
1) Alarm History
2) System Messages
3) System Events
4) Trends

9. Electrical, Gas, and Weather Report:
a. System server capable of periodically gathering energy log data stored in the field equipment and archive the information. Archive files appended with new data, allowing data to be accumulated.
b. Operator able to change the energy log setup information as well. This includes the meters to be logged, meter pulse value, and the type of energy units to be logged. Meters monitored by the system may be logged.
c. System to display archived data in tabular format form for both consumption and peak values. Data shown in hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and yearly formats. In each format the user shall be able to select a specific period of data to view. d. Electrical Meter Report: Provide monthly report showing daily electrical consumption and peak electrical demand with time and date stamp for each building meter and for each electrical sub-meter on individual building panels, circuits, equipment (such as chillers), and variable frequency drives. Provide an annual (12-month) report showing monthly electrical consumption and peak electrical demand with time and date stamp for each individual meter. e. Gas Meter Report: Provide monthly report showing daily natural gas consumption for each meter and sub-meter. Provide annual (12-month) report that shows monthly consumption for each meter.
f. Weather Data Report: Provide monthly report showing daily minimum, maximum, and average outdoor air temperature (dry bulb, wet bulb) and humidity. Provide annual (12-month) report showing minimum, maximum, and average outdoor air temperature for month.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 589
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-10
E. Interfaces to Third Party Systems: BAS connects to third party systems (VFDs, chillers, emergency generators, rooftop AC units, etc). Communication protocol specified for third party system, and BAS provides compatible protocol to assure proper two way communication.

Points, alarms, and commands displayed on BAS as indicated.

F. Workstation Applications Editors: Each PC workstation supports editing of system applications, which downloaded and executed at one or more controller panels.

2.4 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
A. Furnish following applications software for building and energy management. Software applications reside and operate in system controllers. Software to be manufacturer's most current version at the time of installation. Software and associated functions (scheduling, optimum start/stop, etc.) noted in this specification are to be configured and enabled for this project. Incorporate into sequence of operation submittals for review prior to installation.

B. System Security:

1. User access secured using individual security passwords and user names.

2. Record user Log On/Log Off attempts.

3. Provide passwords, user names, and access assignments adjustable at the operator's terminal. Each user to have a set security level, which defines access to displays and individual objects the user may control. System to include ten separate and distinct security levels for assignment to users.

4. System to include an Auto Logout Feature that will automatically logout user when there has been no keyboard or mouse activity for a set period of time. Time period to be adjustable by System Administrator. Auto Logout may be enabled and disabled by System Administrator. Operator terminal to display message on screen that user is logged out after Auto Logout occurs.

C. Scheduling: Provide capability to schedule each object or group of objects in system.

Coordinate schedule with Owner and program accordingly. Each schedule consists of:

1. Operator's workstation to show information in easy-to-read daily format. Priority for scheduling: Events, holidays and daily with events being the highest.

2. Holiday and special event schedules to display data in calendar format. Operator able to schedule holidays and special events directly from these calendars.

3. Operator able to change information for a given weekly or exception schedule if logged on with the appropriate security access.

D. Optimum Start/Stop: Provide software and program system to start equipment on sliding schedule based upon indoor and outdoor conditions. Determine minimum time of HVAC system operation needed to satisfy space environmental requirements and also determine earliest possible time to stop mechanical systems (i.e. shut down cooling/heating and only provide ventilation one hour prior to scheduled unoccupied period). Optimum start/stop program operates in conjunction with scheduled start/stop and night setback programs.

E. Alarms:

1. Operator's workstation to provide visual means of alarm indication. The alarm dialog box to always become the top dialog box regardless of the application(s), currently running.

2. System to provide log of alarm messages. Alarm log to be archived to the hard disk of the system operator's terminal. Each entry to include a description of the event-initiating object generating the alarm. Entry to include time and date of alarm occurrence.

3. Alarm messages in user-definable text and entered either at the operator's terminal or via remote communication.

4. Each binary object set to alarm based on operator-specified state.

5. Each analog object is to have both high and low alarm limits.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 590
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-11

6. Alarms must be able to be automatically and manually disabled.

7. Alarms are routed to appropriate workstations based on time and other conditions. An alarm is able to start programs, print, be logged in event log, generate custom messages, and display graphics.

8. System have ability to dial out in event of alarm.

9. Alarm Levels:
a. Provide 5 levels of alarm as follows, and program alarm levels for every required and specified alarm:
1) Level 1: Critical/life safety.
2) Level 2: Significant equipment failure.
3) Level 3: Non-critical equipment failure/operation.
4) Level 4: Energy conservation monitor.
5) Level 5: Maintenance indication, notification.
b. Prior to training of Owner’s Authorized Representative, submit the complete Points List and suggested Alarm Levels to the Owner.
c. During training of Owner’s Authorized Representative(s):
1) Discuss Alarm Levels and the alarms currently included in the BAS. 2) Provide additional alarms without addition of new hardware points, as required by Owner’s Authorized Representative.
3) Agree with the Owner’s Authorized Representative on action(s) to be taken for each alarm level and implement same for each alarm. Said action to include visual and/or audible alarm(s) at the Operator workstation including whether Operator acknowledgement is required or not, email messages, and text messages.

F. Demand Limiting:

1. System to include demand limiting program that includes two types of load shedding.

One type of load shedding to shed/restore equipment in binary fashion based on energy usage when compared to shed and restore settings. The other type of shedding to adjust operator selected control setpoints in an analog fashion based on energy usage when compared to shed and restore settings. Shedding may be implemented independently on each and every zone or piece of equipment connected to system.

2. Status of each and every load shed program capable of being displayed on every operator terminal connected to system. Status of each load assigned to an individual shed program displayed along with the description of each load.

3. Demand-limiting program monitor building power consumption from signals generated by pulse generator (provided by BAS contractor) mounted at building power meter or from watt transducer or current transformer attached to building feeder lines.

4. Demand-limiting program predicts probable power demand so that when demand exceeds demand limit, action will be taken to reduce loads in predetermined manner.

When demand limit will not be exceeded, action will be taken to restore loads in predetermined manner.

G. Maintenance Management: System monitors equipment status and generate maintenance messages based upon user-designated run-time, starts, and/or calendar date limits. Coordinate settings with Owner.

H. Sequencing: Provide application software based upon sequences of operation specified to properly sequence designated systems. Provide points to achieve specified sequences.

I. Staggered Start: This application prevents controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after a power outage. Order in which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started, along with time delay between starts to be user-selectable.

J. Energy Calculations: Provide software to allow instantaneous power (e.g. kW) or flow rates (e.g.

L/s (gpm)) to be accumulated and converted to energy usage data.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 591
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-12
K. Anti-Short Cycling: Binary output objects protected from short cycling by allowing minimum ontime and off-time to be selected.

L. On/Off Control with Differential: Provide algorithm that allows binary output to be cycled based on controlled variable and setpoint. Algorithm direct-acting or reverse-acting and incorporate adjustable differential.

M. Run-Time Totalization: Provide software to totalize run-times for binary input objects.

2.5 WEB BASED ACCESS
A. General Description: BAS supplier to provide web-based access to the system as part of standard installation. Provide access to user of displays of real-time data that are part of the BAS via a standard web browser. Web browser to tie into the network via Ethernet network connection. Provide web-page host that resides on the BAS network. Web page software not to require a per user licensing fee or annual fees. The web page host must be able to support at least 50 simultaneous users with the ability to expand the system to accommodate an unlimited number of users. Software to be manufacturer's most current version at time of installation.

B. Browser Technology: Browser to be standard version of Microsoft Edge (latest edition). No special vendor-supplied software needed on computers running browser. Displays viewable and the web page host to directly access real-time data from the BAS network. Data displayed in real time and update automatically without user interaction. User able to change data on displays if logged in with the appropriate user name and password.

C. Display of Data: Webpage graphics shown on browser to be replicas of the BAS displays. User is to need no additional training to understand information presented on Web pages when compared to what is shown on BAS displays. Web page displays to include animation just as BAS displays. Fans to turn, pilot lights to blink, and coils to change colors, and so on. Real-time data shown on browser web pages. This data must be directly gathered via the BACnet network and automatically updated on browser webpage displays without any user action. Data on the browser to automatically refresh as changes are detected without re-drawing the complete display. User to be able to change data from browser web page to if the user is logged on with the appropriate password. Clicking on a button or typing in a new value to change digital data.

Using pull-down menus or typing in a new value to change analog data. Data displays navigated using pushbuttons on the displays that are simply clicked on with the mouse to select a new display. Alternatively, the standard back and forward buttons of the browser can be used for display navigation.

D. Web Page Generation: Web pages generated automatically from the BAS displays that reside on the BAS server. User to access web page host via the network and initiate a web page generation utility that automatically takes the BAS displays and turns them into web pages. The web pages generated are automatically installed on the web page host for access via any computer's standard browser. Any system that requires use of an HTML editor for generation of web pages will not be considered.

E. Password Security and Activity Log: Access via web browser to utilize the same hierarchical security scheme as BAS system. User asked to log in once the browser makes connection to web page host. Once the user logs in, any changes that are made are to be tracked by the BAS system. User shall be able to change only those items that the user has authority to change. A user activity report to show any activity of the users that have logged in to the system regardless of whether those changes were made using a browser or via the BAS workstation.

F. Communication: Web-page host to communicate using the specified protocol standard to devices on the BAS network.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 592
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-13

2.6 BAS GRAPHICS
A. Develop customized graphics showing the project building(s) and their floor plans, mechanical and electrical equipment, flow and control diagrams, and other relevant features on Workstation graphic screens. Associated input, output, and virtual objects (e.g., temperature and pressure setpoints) listed in the Sequence of Operation, and shown on the Input/Output Objects List included in the graphic screens and bound to the database. Real-time value of objects updated on the display of each graphic automatically. For projects where existing campus and/or building controls systems exist, replicate graphics used in the existing BAS graphics screens.

B. Graphics to have links to the Print function and to display a Standard Legend in the corner of the graphic. Graphics, except pop-ups, to have the date and time displayed in the upper corner of the graphic. Each graphic titled.

C. Weather: Graphics, except pop-ups, to have the outdoor temperature and humidity in the upper corner of the graphic.

D. Alarms: System and component summary alarms located near the top of each relevant graphic screen. Provide links to the associated system/component as part of these tags to assist trouble shooting. Other alarms placed near the associated system/device as depicted in the graphic.

Provide text and color of information tags that describe each object and alarm value consistent with a graphics color legend.

E. The following graphics provided as a minimum:

1. A building graphic, typically a photograph of the building, with links to each floor plan and other links as defined below.

2. A central plant graphic with equipment (chillers, boilers, pumps, heat exchangers, storage tanks, etc.), temperature sensors, pressure sensors, flow sensors and refrigeration leak detectors. The central plant graphic to have links to each building on the campus.

3. Central equipment such as air handler, package rooftop equipment, supply fans, exhaust fans, and smoke control systems.

4. Floor plans of each floor, with temperature sensors, pressure sensors, temperature control zones, heating/cooling zones, ventilation zones, and supply air zones identified.

Rooms grouped on a graphic only to the extent that detailed and complete sensing information can be comfortably viewed by an operator and the bound points updated in less than 10 seconds. Each zone to have a temperature symbol that changes color over the range from low (blue) through normal (green) to high (red) and indicate an alarm (flashing red). The zone temperature and or pressure symbol(s) to be a link to a zone control pop-up graphic. Individual floor plan graphics to provide links to related mechanical systems. The mechanical room plan graphics to show the relative location of, and provide links to, either the equipment pop-up or flow and control graphic for mechanical equipment monitored or controlled by the BAS.

5. Pop-up graphics provided for each zone control system showing a flow diagram and related monitoring and control points and system parameters. Pop-up graphics provided for each piece of equipment that is not shown on a flow and control graphic.

6. Flow and control diagrams for each system including but not limited to central plant, fan coils, generators, packaged equipment, chilled water systems, heating hot water systems, heat exchangers, pumps, storage tanks, zone terminal units, isolation room systems, smoke damper status, combination fire and smoke damper status, and ventilation systems. The flow and control graphics to have parameters grouped in the lower portion of the graphics. Standard equipment graphics used. Pumps, fans, dampers and other elements to dynamically indicate their state (i.e. pumps and fans to rotate when on and damper positions to dynamically adjust and be shown in their current position, etc.). System flow and control graphics displayed in a general left to right flow or loop arrangement. Return and exhaust air flow shown on top and return water shown on the bottom of the graphic.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 593
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-14

7. Individual equipment/component screens showing sensing and control information available for each device provided.

F. Penetration: The graphic interface to consistently apply a convention whereby a left-click to always penetrate to more detailed information. The text windows to represent the deepest level of penetration. A right-click to always produce a menu of options that are specific to the item selected.

G. Navigation: Graphics organized to provide a "branching structure" that allows an operator to move from a "macro view" to a "micro view" and return. These links to other associated graphics, or allow a return to a previous macro view, provided and arranged horizontally along the bottom of each graphic screen. From left to right, the graphic links as follows: site/building map, building/trailer floor plans, and major mechanical systems at each building. Pop-up right click menus provided as needed on the lower button bar to allow for uncluttered navigation.

H. Clutter Minimization: Each graphic to have separate check boxes in the lower right corner that show/hide setpoints, alarms/safeties, and devices/equipment.

I. Templates: To the maximum extent possible, use standard graphics as templates to provide a consistent look throughout the interface.

J. Color Scheme: The graphics to use dynamic color changes to communicate equipment type, or object status consistent with the graphics color legend.

K. Symbols and Animations: Fans, pumps, dampers, coils, and generation equipment to be dynamic symbols indicating rotation, state, or position, movement, flow, etc.

L. Macros: When macros are used to add functionality to the graphics, detailed documentation provided.

M. Configure Mode: Access to “Configure Mode” for editing of the graphics password protected to prevent unauthorized changes to the graphics. This password supplied to the appropriate personnel.

N. Graphics Version: Graphics provided in the most current format available at time of control system programming.

O. Points and graphics checked for the proper binding and graphic programming, settings to ensure that the correct system, location, point values and dynamics are shown in the proper location and rotate in the proper directions.

P. After graphics have been accepted, provide, on a CD ROM in an agreed upon file structure. If the graphics have active-x controls or other files that must be placed outside the graphics folder structure a set-up program provided on the disk to place the files in the correct locations.

2.7 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER - TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLLERS A. Provide one application controller for each terminal unit that adequately covers objects listed in object list for unit. Controllers to interface to building controller via LAN using specified protocol.

Controllers to include on board flow sensor, inputs, outputs and programmable, self-contained logic program as needed for control of units.

B. Application controllers to include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that can accept thermistors, 0-5 VDC, and dry contact signals. Inputs on controller may be either analog or digital. Controller to also include support and modifiable programming for interface to intelligent October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 594
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-15
room sensor with digital display (digital display to indicate setpoint only). Controller to also include binary outputs on board. For applications using variable speed parallel fans, provide a single analog output selectable for 0-10 V or 0-20 mA control signals. Application controller to include microprocessor driven, self calibrating flow sensor for use in pressure independent control logic. Terminal units controlled using pressure independent control algorithms and flow readings to be in CFM. Flow sensor and controller to have control range of 0.004 in.wc. to 1.5 in.wc. with an accuracy of +5 percent at 1 in.wc.

C. Program sequences stored on board application controller in EEPROM. No batteries needed to retain logic program. Program sequences executed by controller 10 times per second and capable of multiple PI loops for control of multiple devices. Provide programming of application controller completely modifiable in the field over installed specified protocol LANs or remotely via modem interface. Operator to program logic sequences by graphically moving function blocks on screen and tying blocks together on screen. Application controller programmed using the same programming tool as Building Controller and as described in Operator Workstation article.

D. Application controller to include support for intelligent room sensor. Display on room sensor programmable at application controller and include an operating mode and a field service mode.

Button functions and display data programmable to show specific controller data in each mode based on which button is pressed on the sensor. See sequence for specific display requirements for intelligent room sensor.

E. Provide duct temperature sensor at discharge of each terminal unit that is connected to controller for reporting back to operator workstation. Provide analog inputs for the duct temperatures.

2.8 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE
A. Input/output points protected such that shorting of point to itself, to another point, or to ground will cause no damage to controller. Input and output points protected from voltage up to 24 V.

B. Binary inputs (BI or DI) allow monitoring of On/Off signals from remote devices. Binary inputs sense “dry contact” closure without external power (other than that provided by controller) being applied.

C. Pulse accumulation input objects accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse accumulation.

D. Analog inputs (AI) allow monitoring of low-voltage (0 to 10 VDC), current (4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD).

E. Binary outputs (BO or DO) provide for On/Off operation or pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. Binary outputs on building and custom application controllers have three-position (On/Off/Auto) override switches and status lights. Outputs selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation.

F. Analog outputs (AO) provide a modulating signal for control of end devices. Outputs provide either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 mA signal as required to provide proper control of the output device. Analog outputs on building controllers have status lights and two-position (AUTO/MANUAL) switch and adjustable potentiometer for manual override. Analog outputs not exhibit drift of greater than 0.4 percent of range per year.

G. Tri-State Outputs. Provide tri-state outputs (two coordinated binary outputs) for control of threepoint floating type electronic actuators without feedback. Use of three-point floating devices limited to zone control and terminal unit control applications (VAV terminal units, duct-mounted October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 595
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-16
heating coils, zone dampers, radiation, etc.). Control algorithms run zone actuator to one end of its stroke once every 24 hours for verification of operator tracking.

2.9 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING
A. Control transformers UL listed. Furnish Class 2 current-limiting type or furnish over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits. Limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity.

B. DC power supply output match output current and voltage requirements. Unit operates between 32 degrees F and 120 degrees F.

C. Line voltage units UL listed and CSA approved.

D. Power line filtering. Provide transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations and controllers.

2.10 CONTROL PANELS
A. Control Panels:

1. Enclosures may be NEMA 1 when located in a clean, dry, indoor environment. Indoor enclosures to be NEMA 12 when installed in other than a clean environment. Outdoor enclosures must be NEMA 3R. Provide (hinged door) key-lock latch and removable subpanels. Single key common to field panels and subpanels. In existing campus or building settings, key lock to match existing keys.

2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices prewired with color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections UL listed for 600 volt service, individually identified per control/ interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection individually identified per control drawings.

3. Provide ON/OFF power switch with overcurrent protection for control power sources to each local panel.

4. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for enclosures in any mechanical room or electrical room labeled with TCP number. Laminated plastic to be 1/8-inch thick sized appropriately to make label easy to read.

2.11 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES
A. Temperature Instruments:

1. Room Temperature Sensors: Thermistor or platinum RTD type with accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 degrees F at 70 degrees F; operating range 30-120 degrees F; linear signal; single point sensing element in wall-mounted ventilated enclosure with insulating back plate if mounted on exterior wall; plug-in portable operators terminal port.

2. Room Temperature Sensor: Thermistor or platinum RTD type with accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 degrees F at 70 degrees F; operating range 30-120 degrees F; linear signal; single point sensing element in wall-mounted ventilated enclosure with insulating back plate if mounted on exterior wall; push button for occupancy override; digital setpoint adjustment plus or minus 2 degrees F in both directions; LCD temperature display indicating setpoint only. Setpoint adjustment to revert to building programmed standard temperature upon next building occupancy schedule change (user adjustable). Room temperature sensor may have integral space carbon dioxide sensor with minimum performance characteristics identified within this specification.

3. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensors: Thermistor or platinum RTD element with accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 degrees F at 32 degrees F, consisting of array of single point sensing elements, securely mounted in duct or plenum; operating range 20-120 October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 596
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-17
degrees F; linear signal; 1-foot element per 2 SF of duct cross-sectional area. Use when duct is 9 SF or larger or where air is subject to temperature stratification.

4. Probe Duct Temperature Sensors: Thermistor or platinum RTD element with accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 degrees F at 32 degrees F, consisting of single point sensing elements, securely mounted in duct or plenum; operating range 20-120 degrees F; linear signal; 24- inch rigid probe. Use where duct is less than 9 SF cross-sectional area.

B. Pressure Transmitters and Transducers:

1. Transducer have linear output signal; field adjustable zero and span. Sensing elements withstand continuous operating conditions of positive or negative pressure 50 percent greater than calibrated span without damage.

2. Differential Pressure Switch: Setpoint adjustable with operating range of 0.5 to 12-inch WG for fans, and 5- to 30-feet WC for pumps. Switches UL listed; SPDT snap-acting; pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum); NEMA 1 enclosure; scale range and differential suitable for intended application.

3. Filter Differential Pressure Switch: Setpoint adjustable with operating range of 0.1- to 5- inch WG; auto reset. Contactor to close when pressure differential setting is met or exceeded. Provide mounting bracket, metallic tubing and appropriate fittings for connection to duct or air-handling unit.

4. Duct Static Differential Pressure Transducer: Operating range 0- to 5-inch WC for duct mounted transmitter; ceramic capacitive sensing element with probe securely mounted in duct; digital input terminal and push button to zero output. Accuracy plus or minus 1 percent of full scale; maximum response time 2 seconds.

5. Piping Pressure Transmitter: Operating range 0 to 50 PSIG, linear signal; stainless steel diaphragm; digital input terminal and push button to zero output. Accuracy plus or minus 1 percent of full scale.

C. Motorized Control Dampers:

1. Performance: Maximum leakage of 3 CFM/SF at 1-inch WG differential pressure, AMCA Class 1A, maximum pressure rating of 13-inch WG differential pressure, maximum velocity of 6,000 fpm, -72 degrees F to 275 degrees F temperature rating.

2. Multi-blade type, except where either dimension is less than 10-inch single blade may be used. Maximum blade length to be 48-inch.

3. Provide parallel blades for modulating mixing service and opposed blades for throttling service.

4. Blades to be interlocking; minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel; compression type edge seals and side seating stops. In copper, aluminum and stainless steel duct work, damper material matches duct work material.

5. Damper blades are reinforced, have continuous full length axle shafts, axle to axle linkage, and/or operating “jackshafts” as required to provide coordinated tracking of blades.

6. Bearings: Self-lubricating stainless steel sleeve or Celcon bearing.

7. Dampers over 25 SF in area to be in two or more sections, with interconnected blades.

8. Provide remote damper blade position status with binary input.

9. Tested in accordance with AMCA Standard No. 500.

D. Motorized Control Valves:

1. Body pressure rating and connection type construction conforms to pipe, fitting and valve schedules.

2. Fluid valve close-off ratings and spring ranges operate at maximum flows and maximum available pump heads scheduled without leakage.

3. Screwed ends except 2-1/2-inch and larger valves with flanged ends.

4. Motorized Control Valves (Pressure Independent Control Valves):
a. Description: Valve consists of pressure compensating cartridge, actuated ball or Y pattern globe valve, and multiple pressure/temperature test ports in a single valve housing.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 597
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-18
b. Construction: Rated for no less than 125 PSI and 250 degrees F. 2-inch and Smaller: brass with threaded connections. 2-1/2-inch and larger: cast iron with flanged connections.
c. Performance: Flow rate controlled linearly to within 5 percent of target flow rate, for any actuator position (0 to 100 percent), over an operating differential pressure range of 6 to 50 PSI across the valve. Provide valve with integral test ports to verify pressure differential.
d. Manufacturers: Belimo, Danfoss, Flow Control Industries, Griswold, Tour and Andersson, or approved equivalent.

5. Fluid three-way valves globe valves with linear plug with composition disc for tight shutoff.

6. Pressure drop equal to twice pressure drop through heat exchanger (load), 50 percent of pressure difference between supply and return mains, or 5 PSI, whichever is greater, except two-position valves to be line size.

7. Bubble-tight line size butterfly valves acceptable on 2-1/2-inch lines and above for twoposition action only; cast iron body; aluminum bronze disc; EPDM seat, 200 PSI wg.

E. Electronic Pressure Independent Control Valves:

1. General: Assembly consisting of electric control valve, flow measuring station and control to provide constant flow regardless of varying pressure differentials. Flow setpoint electronically adjustable.

2. Communication: BACnet MS/TP.

3. Control Type: Modulating.

4. Fluid: Chilled or hot water, up to 60 percent glycol.

5. Materials:
a. Valve body: Nickel plated brass (1/2-inch to 2-inch), cast iron (2-1/2-inch to 6-inch). b. Sensor housing: Nickel plated forged brass (1/2-inch to 2-inch), ductile iron (2-1/2- inch to 6-inch).
c. Ball: Stainless steel.
d. Stem: Stainless steel.
e. Characterized disc: Tefzel (1/2-inch to 2-inch), stainless steel (2-1/2-inch to 6- inch).

6. Fluid Temperature Range: 14F to 250F.

7. Pressure Rating: 360 PSIG (1/2-inch to 2-inch), ANSI 125, Class B (2-1/2-inch to 6-inch.

8. Close-off Pressure: 200 PSID (1/2-inch to 2-inch), 100 PSID (2-1/2-inch to 6-inch).

9. Leakage: 0 percent.

10. Rangeability: 100:1.

11. Flow control tolerance: +/-5 percent.

12. Flow measurement tolerance: +/-2 percent.

13. Connections: Flanged or threaded to match piping.

14. Power Loss Fail Position: Last position.

15. Actuator: Manual override, electrically reversable.

16. Listing: UL or CSA.

17. Communication feedback: Actual flow, valve position.

18. Manufacturer: Belimo ePIV or approved equivalent.

F. Electric Damper/Valve Actuators:

1. Provide mechanical or electronic stall protection for each actuator.

2. Where indicated provide internal mechanical, spring-return mechanism or provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS). Non-spring-return actuators have external manual gear release to position damper/valve when actuator is not powered.

3. Proportional actuators accepts 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 20 mA control signal and provide 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA operating range.

4. Actuator sized for torque required plus 25 percent; UL or CSA listed; electronic current overload protection.

October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 598
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-19

5. For system differential pressure control valves, provide fast acting valve actuator with valve open or close time of 30 to 60 seconds.

6. VAV Actuators: Actuators proportional 24 VAC actuators using a 4 to 20 mA range of control signals; stops automatically at end of travel; include permanently lubricated gear train.

7. Actuators for emergency generator damper control rated for 350 degree F. maximum operating temperature and capable to drive fully open and close within 15 seconds.

G. Room Pressure Monitor: Active room pressure monitor and alarm which provides local audio alarm and analog and alarm signals to DDC system. Wall mounted panel with LED differential pressure readout; audible and visual alarm; mute button; range of -0.05 to +0.05-inch WC; accurate to 1 percent of full scale; repeatability plus or minus 1.0 percent of full scale per year, alarm delay ability between 0-30 seconds. Provide door switch to deactivate alarm when space door(s) are open. Input status from BAS to deactivate alarm in unoccupied or shutdown modes.

Phoenix Controls APM100.

H. Wall Mounted Space Carbon Dioxide Sensor:

1. Sensor to employ non-dispersive infrared technology (N.D.I.R.).

2. Sensor Repeatability: Plus or minus 20 ppm. 0-2000.

3. Sensor Accuracy: Less than or equal to 75 ppm over 0-1500 ppm range.

4. Sensor Response Time: Less than 1 minute.

5. Sensor to employ reference channel design for long-term stability.

6. Sensor to have field selectable 0-10VDC, or 4-20mA outputs.

7. Sensor power requirement less than 3W.

8. Sensor Input Voltage: 20 to 30VAC/DC.

9. Sensor Operating Temperature Range: 0 degrees C to 50 degrees C.

10. Sensor to have models for wall mounting or duct mounting.

11. Sensor to provide at least a 1-year factory warranty from date of purchase.

12. Sensor to match cover in color and look to temperature sensor.

13. Sensor to have display.

14. Manufacturers:
a. Telaire
b. Vaisala
c. Veris
I. Occupancy Sensor: Dual technology infrared and ultrasonic sensing device, ceiling or wall mounted, built-in self-adjusting settings, timer settings of 30 seconds to 30 minutes, with manual and automatic modes. Provide multiple devices in parallel when area served is greater than a single device sensing capability. Provide integral power pack, 120 VAC input, 24 VDC output, with manual override switch. Leviton OSC-MOW series.

J. Paddle Type Flow Switches: Paddle type switches (water service only) UL listed, SPDT snapacting with pilot duty rating (125 VA minimum) and have adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 1 enclosure.

K. Relays:

1. Control relays UL listed plug-in type with dust cover and LED “energized” indicator.

Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage to be suitable for application.

2. Time delay relays UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay. Delay adjustable plus or minus 200 percent (minimum) from setpoint or as indicated. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage to be suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure when not installed in local control panel.

L. Override Timers: Override timers spring-wound line voltage, UL Listed, with contact rating and configuration as required by application. Provide 0-to-6-hour calibrated dial unless otherwise October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 599
WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-20
specified. Timer suitable for flush mounting on control panel face and located on local control panels or where shown.

M. Current Transmitters:

1. AC current transmitters are self-powered, combination split-core current transformer type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4 to 20 mA two-wire output. Unit range compatible with actual applied span of current value, with internal zero and span adjustment and plus or minus 1 percent full-scale accuracy at 500 ohm maximum burden.

2. Transmitter meets or exceeds ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and UL/CSA recognized.

3. Unit split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.

N. Current Transformers: AC current transformers UL/CSA recognized and completely encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic material; plus or minus 1 percent accuracy at 5 A fullscale.

O. Voltage Transmitters: AC voltage; self-powered single-loop (two-wire) type; 4 to 20 mA output with zero and span adjustment; UL/CSA recognized at 600 VAC rating and meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1. Ranges include 100 to 130 VAC, 200 to 250 VAC, 250 to 330 VAC, and 400 to 600 VAC full-scale, adjustable, with plus or minus 1 percent full-scale accuracy with 500 ohm maximum burden.

P. Voltage Transformers: AC voltage transformers UL/CSA recognized, 600 VAC rated; built-in fuse protection; suitable for ambient temperatures of 40 degrees F to 130 degrees F; plus or minus 0.5 percent accuracy at 24 VAC and a 5 VA load.

Q. Power Monitors: Selectable rate pulse output for kWh reading; 4-20 mA output for kW reading; N.O. alarm contact; ability to operate with 5.0 amp current inputs or 0-0.33 volt inputs; plus 1.0 percent full-scale true RMS power accuracy; plus 0.5 Hz, voltage input range 120-600 V, and auto range select; NEMA 1 enclosure. Current transformers having a 0.5 percent FS accuracy, 600 VAC isolation voltage with 0-0.33 V output. If 0-5 A current transformers are provided, a three-phase disconnect/shorting switch assembly is required.

R. Overflow Switch: Insertion flow sensor, brass, impeller flow design with analog transmitter unit.

Data Industrial Model 220BR.

S. Ultrasonic Level Transmitter: Non-contact measuring device for liquid level; distance ranges from 4-feet to 32-feet; fail-safe intelligence with diagnostic feedback for troubleshooting; automatic temperature compensation; 24VDC; accuracy plus 0.15 percent of span in air. Kele LU Series.

T. Pressure-Electric (PE) Switches: Metal or neoprene diaphragm actuated; operating pressure rated 0-25 PSIG; calibrated scale setpoint range of 2-18 PSIG minimum; UL listed. Provide oneor two-stage switch action SPDT, DPST, or DPDT, as required by application. Electrically rated for pilot duty service (125 VA minimum) and/or for motor control. Permanent indicating gauge on each pneumatic signal line to PE switches.

San Carlos City CouncilNovember 10, 2025

San Carlos City Council
November 10, 2025